Lenovo 6534 User Manual
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Machine Types: 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534.  
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Machine Types: 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534.  
Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix  
A “Notices” on page 221 and the Warranty and Support Information document on the ThinkServer  
Documentation DVD.  
Third Edition (September 2010)  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010.  
LENOVO products, data, computer software, and services have been developed exclusively at private expense and are  
sold to governmental entities as commercial items as defined by 48 C.F.R. 2.101 with limited and restricted rights to  
use, reproduction and disclosure.  
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If products, data, computer software, or services are delivered pursuant  
a General Services Administration ″GSA″ contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth  
in Contract No. GS-35F-05925.  
Contents  
Chapter 1. About this manual . . . . . 1  
Software problems .  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
60  
61  
61  
61  
63  
64  
64  
65  
65  
Important Safety Information .  
Safety statements  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
2
.
.
.
.
.
Video problems  
Error LEDs .  
Power-supply LEDs.  
System pulse LEDs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Important information about replacing RoHS  
.
.
.
compliant FRUs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5
5
Turkish statement of compliance  
Diagnostic programs and messages .  
Running the diagnostic programs  
Chapter 2. General information. . . . . 7  
Features and technologies .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7
9
11  
12  
12  
Diagnostic text messages  
Viewing the test log .  
Diagnostic messages .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Specifications .  
Software .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
66  
66  
.
.
EasyStartup .  
EasyManage.  
Recovering the server firmware .  
Automated boot recovery (ABR) .  
100  
102  
102  
103  
103  
104  
104  
Three boot failure  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3. General Checkout. . . . . 13  
Solving power problems .  
Solving Ethernet controller problems .  
Solving undetermined problems .  
Problem determination tips .  
Checkout procedure  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
13  
13  
14  
14  
16  
About the checkout procedure  
Performing the checkout procedure  
Diagnosing a problem .  
Undocumented problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls  
and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . 17  
Front view  
Rear view.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
107  
108  
108  
109  
109  
111  
112  
113  
113  
113  
Diagnostic tools .  
Event logs .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17  
17  
18  
.
.
System-board internal connectors .  
System-board external connectors.  
System-board optional-device connectors.  
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility  
Viewing event logs without restarting the  
server  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18  
19  
19  
19  
26  
27  
46  
46  
47  
48  
48  
50  
51  
System-board switches and jumpers .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Clearing the event logs  
System-board LEDs  
Server power features .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
POST .  
POST error codes.  
System-event log  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Turning on the server  
Turning off the server  
.
.
Integrated management module error messages .  
Troubleshooting tables  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs. . . . . 115  
Guidelines for trained service technicians .  
EasyStartup problems .  
DVD drive problems .  
General problems.  
Hard disk drive problems.  
Hypervisor problems  
.
.
.
.
.
.
115  
115  
.
.
Inspecting for unsafe conditions .  
Guidelines for servicing electrical  
.
.
.
equipment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115  
116  
117  
117  
119  
119  
119  
120  
121  
121  
121  
.
.
.
Working inside the server with the power on.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Major components of the server .  
Intermittent problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device  
problems .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
52  
53  
54  
54  
57  
58  
59  
Removing and installing the cover .  
Memory problems  
Removing the cover .  
Installing the cover .  
Removing and installing the bezel .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Microprocessor problems  
Monitor problems.  
Optional-device problems  
.
.
.
Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle .  
Power problems .  
Serial-device problems  
.
.
.
.
Removing the DIMM air baffle .  
Installing the DIMM air baffle  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
v
Replacing a memory module (DIMM) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
122  
122  
125  
125  
126  
Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch  
drives) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
155  
156  
156  
157  
Supported memory types  
Removing a memory module .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly .  
Removing the riser-card assembly .  
Installing a memory module.  
Replacing hard disk drives .  
.
.
Installing the riser-card assembly  
.
.
.
Replacing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
Removing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA)  
Controller.  
Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
158  
158  
hard disk drive .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127  
Installing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
hard disk drive .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
127  
128  
129  
130  
130  
132  
Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive .  
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive .  
controller .  
Replacing the DVD drive cable  
Removing the DVD drive cable  
Installing the DVD drive cable .  
Replacing a DVD drive  
Removing a DVD drive.  
Installing a DVD drive .  
Replacing the virtual media key .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
159  
161  
161  
161  
163  
163  
164  
165  
165  
166  
167  
Replacing a PCI card .  
Removing a PCI card .  
Installing a PCI card .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash  
device .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
133  
134  
134  
134  
134  
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash  
device .  
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the virtual media key .  
Installing the virtual media key.  
device .  
Replacing the operator information panel  
assembly .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replacing the PCI-X riser-card power cable .  
Removing the PCI-X riser-card power  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the operator information panel  
cable.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
167  
168  
168  
170  
172  
173  
174  
assembly .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Installing the PCI-X riser-card power cable .  
Installing the operator information panel  
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) .  
assembly .  
Replacing the drive cage.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
135  
136  
136  
137  
139  
139  
141  
142  
143  
143  
145  
145  
146  
147  
148  
148  
149  
150  
150  
151  
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data.  
Completing the FRU replacement .  
Connecting the cables . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the drive cage .  
Installing the drive cage .  
.
.
Updating the server configuration  
Replacing the microprocessor and heat sink .  
Removing the microprocessor.  
Installing the microprocessor .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types  
6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 . . . . . 175  
Thermal grease  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Replaceable server components.  
Power cords .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
176  
193  
Replacing the system board  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing the system board  
Installing the system board .  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server . 197  
Replacing the power supply  
.
.
Using the Setup Utility.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
197  
198  
198  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
206  
Removing the power supply  
Installing the power supply .  
Starting the Setup Utility .  
Setup Utility menu choices .  
Passwords .  
Replacing a fan assembly .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Removing a fan assembly  
Installing a fan assembly .  
Using the Boot Manager program .  
Configuring RAID controllers .  
.
.
Replacing the system-board battery .  
Using LSI Configuration Utility program .  
Removing the battery .  
Installing the battery.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the WebBIOS utility .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility .  
Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate  
or backplane  
Removing the backplane or back plate  
(3.5-inch drives)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
153  
153  
153  
155  
Creating a storage configuration using the  
Configuration Wizard  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
206  
207  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Viewing and changing properties.  
Viewing and changing virtual disk  
Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch  
drives) .  
Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch  
drives) .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
properties.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
207  
207  
Using the EasyStartup DVD.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vi Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD .  
EasyStartup overview . .  
Installing your operating system without using  
.
.
.
.
.
.
208  
208  
Trademarks .  
Important notes .  
Product recycling and disposal .  
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on  
the Restriction of Hazardous Substances .  
Recycling statements for Japan .  
Battery return program  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement.  
Electronic emission notices. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
222  
222  
223  
.
.
.
.
.
EasyStartup .  
Updating the firmware.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
210  
211  
211  
212  
212  
213  
214  
215  
215  
215  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
224  
224  
225  
226  
226  
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Starting the backup server firmware .  
Recovering the UEFI firmware.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the integrated management module.  
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
statement .  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance  
statement .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
226  
226  
226  
226  
227  
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software .  
Installation requirements .  
Installation order . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Avis de conformité à la réglementation  
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit  
components .  
d'Industrie Canada .  
Australia and New Zealand Class A  
statement .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
216  
217  
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent .  
Using the remote presence capability and  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
United Kingdom telecommunications safety  
requirement .  
European Union EMC Directive conformance  
blue-screen capture  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
217  
217  
217  
218  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Enabling the remote presence feature .  
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM .  
statement .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
227  
227  
Logging on to the Web interface .  
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility  
program .  
.
.
Germany Class A compliance statement.  
Japan Voluntary Control Council for  
Interference (VCCI) statement .  
Taiwan Class A warning statement .  
People's Republic of China Class A warning  
statement .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
218  
218  
219  
219  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
228  
228  
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers .  
Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL) .  
UEFI update and configuration .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
229  
229  
.
.
.
.
Korea Class A warning statement  
Appendix A. Notices . . . . . . . . 221  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
vii  
viii Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
This Hardware Maintenance Manual contains information to help you solve problems that might occur in  
your server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and suggested actions,  
and instructions for replacing failing components.  
Replaceable components are of three types:  
• Self-service customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of self-service CRUs is your responsibility.  
If Lenovo® installs a self-service CRU at your request, you will be charged for the installation.  
• Optional-service customer replaceable unit: You may install an optional-service CRU yourself or  
request Lenovo to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated  
for the server.  
• Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.  
The most recent version of this document is available at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Before servicing a Lenovo product, be sure to read the Safety Information. See “Important Safety  
Information” on page 1.  
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and  
Support Information document.  
Important Safety Information  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this book before performing any of the instructions.  
Veuillez lire toutes les consignes de type DANGER et ATTENTION du présent document avant d'exécuter  
les instructions.  
Lesen Sie unbedingt alle Hinweise vom Typ "ACHTUNG" oder "VORSICHT" in dieser Dokumentation, bevor  
Sie irgendwelche Vorgänge durchführen  
Leggere le istruzioni introdotte da ATTENZIONE e PERICOLO presenti nel manuale prima di eseguire una  
qualsiasi delle istruzioni  
Certifique-se de ler todas as instruções de cuidado e perigo neste manual antes de executar qualquer  
uma das instruções  
Es importante que lea todas las declaraciones de precaución y de peligro de este manual antes de seguir  
las instrucciones.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
1
     
Safety statements  
Important: Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This number is  
used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger statement with translated versions of the  
caution or danger statement in the Safety Information document.  
For example, if a caution statement is labeled "Statement 1," translations for that caution statement are in  
the Safety Information document under "Statement 1."  
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you perform the procedures. Read  
any additional safety information that comes with the server or optional device before you install the device.  
Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified telecommunication line cord.  
Statement 1  
DANGER Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous.  
To avoid a shock hazard:  
• Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of  
this product during an electrical storm.  
• Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.  
• Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product.  
• When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.  
• Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.  
• Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems, networks, and modems before you  
open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.  
• Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when installing, moving, or opening  
covers on this product or attached devices.  
To Connect:  
To Disconnect:  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
1. Turn everything OFF.  
2. First, attach all cables to devices.  
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.  
4. Attach power cords to outlet.  
5. Turn device ON.  
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.  
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.  
4. Remove all cables from devices.  
Statement 2  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only a type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If  
your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module type  
made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used,  
handled, or disposed of. Do not:  
2
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
• Throw or immerse into water  
• Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
• Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
Statement 3  
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
• Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
Statement 4  
≥ 18 kg (39.7 lb)  
≥ 32 kg (70.5 lb)  
≥ 55 kg (121.2 lb)  
CAUTION:  
Use safe practices when lifting.  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
3
Statement 5  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power  
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected  
from the power source.  
2
1
Statement 8  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Statement 26  
CAUTION:  
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.  
Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system whose maximum phase-to-phase  
voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault condition.  
Important: This product is not suitable for use with visual display workplace devices according to Clause 2  
of the German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
4
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Important information about replacing RoHS compliant FRUs  
RoHS, The Restriction of Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive  
(2002/95/EC) is a European Union legal requirement affecting the global electronics industry. RoHS  
requirements must be implemented on Lenovo products placed on the market and sold in the  
European Union after June 2006. Products on the market before June 2006 are not required to  
have RoHS compliant parts. If the parts are not compliant originally, replacement parts can also  
be noncompliant, but in all cases, if the parts are compliant, the replacement parts must also be  
compliant.  
Note: RoHS and non-RoHS FRU part numbers with the same fit and function are identified with unique  
FRU part numbers.  
Lenovo plans to transition to RoHS compliance well before the implementation date and expects its suppliers  
to be ready to support Lenovo's requirements and schedule in the EU. Products sold in 2005 will contain  
some RoHS compliant FRUs. The following statement pertains to these products and any product Lenovo  
produces containing RoHS compliant parts.  
RoHS compliant ThinkServer RS210 parts have unique FRU part numbers. Before or after June, 2006, failed  
RoHS compliant parts must always be replaced using RoHS compliant FRUs, so only the FRUs identified as  
compliant in the system Hardware Maintenance Manual or direct substitutions for those FRUs can be used.  
Products marketed before June 2006  
Products marketed after June 2006  
Replacement FRU  
Replacement FRU  
Must be RoHS  
Current or original part  
Non-RoHS  
Current or original part  
Can be Non-RoHS  
Can be RoHS  
Must be RoHS  
Non-RoHS  
Non-RoHS  
Can sub to RoHS  
Must be RoHS  
RoHS  
Note: A direct substitution is a part with a different FRU part number that is automatically shipped by the  
distribution center at the time of order.  
Turkish statement of compliance  
The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use  
of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).  
Chapter 1. About this manual  
5
   
6
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Chapter 2. General information  
This chapter provides general information that applies to all machine types supported by this publication.  
Features and technologies  
The server uses the following features and technologies:  
• UEFI-compliant server firmware  
UEFI replaces the basic input/output system (BIOS) and defines a standard interface between the  
operating system, platform firmware, and external devices. The server design combines the UEFI  
capabilities and features with legacy BIOS compatibility. UEFI-compliant servers are capable of starting  
UEFI-compliant operating systems, BIOS-based operating systems, and BIOS-based adapters as well  
as UEFI-compliant adapters.  
Note: This server does not support DOS.  
• Dual-core or quad-core processing  
The server supports one Intel® Xeon® or Celeron® dual-core or quad-core microprocessor.  
• Integrated management module  
The Integrated management module (IMM) combines service processor functions, video controller, and  
(when an optional virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip. The IMM  
provides advanced service-processor control, monitoring, and alerting function. If an environmental  
condition exceeds a threshold or if a system component fails, the IMM lights LEDs to help you diagnose  
the problem, records the error in the event log, and alerts you to the problem. Optionally, the IMM also  
provides a virtual presence capability for remote server management capabilities. The IMM provides  
remote server management through the following industry-standard interfaces:  
– Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) version 2.0  
– Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) version 3  
– Common Information Model (CIM)  
– Web browser  
For additional information, see “Using the integrated management module” on page 213.  
• Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of the integrated  
management module (IMM) and are available with the purchase of the optional Lenovo Virtual Media Key.  
A virtual media key is required to enable the remote presence and blue-screen capture features. The  
remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
– Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024, regardless of the system state  
– Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client  
– Mapping the DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote client, and mapping ISO and  
diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for use by the server  
– Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM restarts the server  
when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A system administrator can use the  
blue-screen capture to assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.  
See “Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture” on page 217 for additional  
information.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
7
   
• Large system-memory capability  
The memory bus supports up to 24 GB of memory when registered DIMMs are installed. The server  
supports up to 8 GB if unbuffered DIMMs are installed. The memory controller supports error correcting  
code (ECC) for up to six industry-standard PC3-8500 or PC3-10600R-999, 1066 and 1333 MHz, DDR3  
(third-generation double-data-rate), registered or unbuffered, synchronous dynamic random access  
memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).  
• Integrated network support  
The server comes with an integrated Intel Gigabit Ethernet controller, which supports connection to a 10  
Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1000 Mbps network. For more information, see “Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet  
controllers” on page 218.  
• Integrated Trust Platform Module  
This integrated security chip performs cryptographic functions and stores private and public secure keys.  
It provides the hardware support for the Trusted Computing Group (TCG) specification.  
• Large data-storage capacity and hot-swap capabilityThe server supports a maximum of four 2.5-inch  
hot-swap Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) hard disk drives, two 3.5-inch simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard  
disk drives, or two 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or SATA hard disk drives, depending on the server model.  
With the hot-swap feature, you can add, remove, or replace hard disk drives without turning off the server.  
• PCI card capabilities  
The server has two PCI interface slots (one supports low-profile cards and one supports half-length,  
full-height cards). Both slots can support PCI Express PCI cards.  
• RAID support  
The RAID controller provides hardware redundant array of independent disks (RAID) support. The  
standard RAID controller provides RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E. Optional RAID PCI cards are available for  
purchase that provide additional RAID levels.  
• Systems-management capabilities  
The server comes with an Integrated Management Module (IMM). When the IMM is used with the  
systems-management software that comes with the server, you can manage the functions of the server  
locally and remotely. The IMM also provides system monitoring, event recording, and network alert  
capability. The systems-management connector provides additional security by physically separating the  
management network traffic from the production network. You can use the Setup Utility to configure the  
server to use a dedicated systems-management network or a shared network.  
• TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) support  
The Ethernet controllers in the server support TOE, which is a technology that offloads the TCP/IP  
flow from the microprocessor and I/O subsystem to increase the speed of the TCP/IP flow. When an  
operating system that supports TOE is running on the server and TOE is enabled, the server supports TOE  
operation. See the operating-system documentation for information about enabling TOE.  
Note: The Linux operating system does not support TOE.  
• Preboot diagnostics program  
The preboot diagnostics programs are stored on the integrated USB memory. They collect and analyze  
system information to aid in diagnosing server problems. The diagnostic programs collect the following  
information about the server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI (formerly called BIOS) configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
8
Hardware Maintenance Manual  
– Event logs for RAID controllers and service processors  
The diagnostics programs create a merged log that includes events from all collected logs. The  
information is collected into a file that you can send to the Lenovo technical support team to help  
diagnose a problem. Additionally, you can view the information locally through a generated text report file.  
You can also copy the log to a removable medium and view the HTML log from a Web browser.  
For additional information about diagnostics, see Chapter 4 “Diagnostics” on page 17.  
• EasyStartup DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program guides you through the configuration of RAID controllers and the  
installation of the operating system and device drivers. See “Using the EasyStartup DVD” on page 207  
for details.  
• EasyManage DVD  
The ThinkServer EasyManage program helps you manage and administer your servers through remote  
problem notification as well as monitoring and alerting.  
Specifications  
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the server. Depending on the  
server model, some features might not be available, or some specifications might not apply.  
Chapter 2. General information  
9
 
Table 1. Features and specifications  
Microprocessor:  
Integrated functions:  
SATA optical drives:  
• Integrated management module  
(IMM), which provides service  
processor control and monitoring  
functions, video controller, and  
(when the optional virtual media  
key is installed) remote keyboard,  
video, mouse, and remote hard  
disk drive capabilities  
• ®Intel 82574L Gb Ethernet  
controller with TCP/IP Offload  
Engine (TOE) and ®Wake on LAN  
support  
• Seven Universal Serial Bus (USB)  
2.0 ports (two front, four rear, and  
one internal for the optional USB  
Hypervisor flash device)  
• Two Ethernet ports  
• Four-port integrated SATA  
controller  
• Supports one Intel® quad-core  
(Xeon 3400 series) or dual-core  
(Celeron G1101, Pentium G6950,  
or core i3 series) processor  
with the IbexPeak 3420 chip set  
and Multi-chip Package (MCP)  
processor architecture  
• UltraSlim DVD-ROM combo  
(optional)  
• Multi-burner (optional)  
Hard disk drive expansion bays  
(depending on the model):  
• Designed for LGA 1156 socket  
• Scalable up to four cores  
One of the following configurations:  
• Four 2.5-inch hot-swap SAS hard  
disk drive bays  
• 32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB  
data cache, and up to 8 MB cache  
that is shared among the cores  
• Two 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or  
hot-swap SATA hard disk drive  
bays  
• Support for ®Intel Extended  
Memory 64 Technology (EM64T)  
• Two 3.5-inch simple-swap SAS  
hard disk drive bays  
Notes:  
• Use the Setup utility to determine  
the type and speed of the  
microprocessor.  
PCI expansion slots:  
• Integrated Trusted Platform  
Module (TPM) support  
• One serial port  
Supports two PCI riser slots on the  
riser card that connects to slots 1 and  
2 on the system board:  
• One VGA port  
Memory:  
• Minimum: 1 GB  
• Maximum: 32 GB  
• Slot 1 supports low-profile cards  
(PCI Express Gen2 x8  
– 16 GB using unbuffered DIMMs  
(UDIMMs)  
– 32 GB using registered DIMMs  
(RDIMMs)  
• Slot 2 supports 3/4-length,  
full-height cards (PCI Express  
Gen2 x8 or PCI-X 1.0a 64-bit/133  
MHz)  
• Types: PC3-8500 or  
PC3-10600R-999 (single-rank  
or double-rank), 1066, and 1333  
MHz, ECC, DDR3 registered or  
unbuffered SDRAM DIMMs only  
• Connectors: Six dual inline  
memory module (DIMM)  
connectors, two-way interleaved  
• Supports:  
Power supply:  
One 351-watt power supply or one  
351-watt high efficiency power  
supply.  
Fans:  
– 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB (when  
available) unbuffered DIMMS  
– 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB  
(when available) registered  
DIMMs  
The server comes standard with five  
speed-controlled fans.  
10 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)  
RAID controllers:  
1. Power consumption and heat  
output vary depending on the  
number and type of optional  
features installed and the  
power-management optional  
features in use.  
Video controller (integrated into  
IMM):  
• Matrox G200  
• SVGA compatible video controller  
• DDR2 128 MB SDRAM video  
memory  
• Avocent Digital Video Compression  
• Video memory is not expandable  
• An IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller that provides  
RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E (comes  
standard on some hot-swap SAS  
and hot-swap SATA models).  
2. The sound levels were measured  
in controlled acoustical  
• An optional IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA Controller SAS/SATA  
adapter that provides RAID levels  
0, 1, 5, 6, and 10 can be ordered.  
environments according to  
Note: The maximum video resolution  
is 1280 x 1024  
the procedures specified by the  
American National Standards  
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and  
• An optional IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller that provides  
RAID levels 0,1,10, and 5 can be  
ordered.  
Size:  
ISO 7779 and are reported in  
accordance with ISO 9296. Actual  
sound-pressure levels in a given  
location might exceed the average  
values stated because of room  
reflections and other nearby noise  
sources. The noise emission level  
stated in the declared (upper limit)  
sound-power level, in bels, for a  
random sample of system.  
• Height: 43 mm (1.69 inches, 1U)  
• Depth: 560.1 mm (22 inches)  
• Width: 430 mm (17.3 inches)  
• Maximum weight: 11.4 kg (25.1 lb)  
when fully configured  
Acoustical noise emissions:  
• Sound power, idling: 6.5 bels  
maximum  
• Sound power, operating: 6.5 bels  
maximum  
Heat output:  
Approximate heat output:  
• Minimum configuration: 171 BTU  
per hour (50 watts)  
• Maximum configuration: 1024 BTU  
per hour (300 watts)  
Environment:  
• Air temperature:  
3. There is no keyboard connector or  
mouse connector on the server.  
You can connect a USB keyboard  
and USB mouse to the server by  
using the USB connectors.  
– Server on: 10°C to 35°C (50.0°F  
to 95.0°F); altitude: 0 to 914.4  
m (3000 ft)  
– Server on: 10°C to 32°C (50.0°F  
to 89.6°F); altitude: 914.4 m  
(3000 ft) to 2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
– Server off: 10°C to 43°C (50°F  
to 109.4°F); maximum altitude:  
2133.6 m (7000.0 ft)  
Electrical input:  
• Sine-wave input (50 / 60 Hz)  
required  
• Input voltage low range:  
– Minimum: 100 V ac  
– Maximum: 127 V ac  
• Input voltage high range:  
– Minimum: 200 V ac  
– Maximum: 240 V ac  
• Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA),  
approximately:  
– Shipping: -40°C to 60°C (-104°F  
to 140°F)  
• Humidity:  
– Server on: 8% to 80%  
– Server off: 8% to 80%  
• Particulate contamination:  
– Minimum: 0.102 kVA  
– Maximum: 0.55 kVA  
Attention: Airborne particulates  
and reactive gases acting alone  
or in combination with other  
environmental factors such as  
humidity or temperature might  
pose a risk to the server. For  
information about the limits for  
particulates and gases, see  
Appendix A “Notices” on page  
221.  
Software  
Lenovo provides software to help get your server up and running.  
Chapter 2. General information 11  
 
EasyStartup  
The ThinkServer EasyStartup program simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and  
installing supported ®Microsoft®Windows and Linux operating systems and device drivers on your server.  
The EasyStartup program is provided with your server on DVD. The DVD is self starting (bootable). The User  
Guide for the EasyStartup program is on the DVD and can be accessed directly from the program interface.  
For additional information, see “Using the EasyStartup DVD” on page 207.  
EasyManage  
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core server provides centralized hardware and software inventory  
management and secure automated system management through a centralized console. The ThinkServer  
EasyManage Agent enables other clients on the network to be managed by the centralized console.  
The ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server is supported on 32-bit Windows Server 2008 products. The  
ThinkServer EasyManage Agent is supported on 32-bit and 64-bit Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE operating  
systems.  
12 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Chapter 3. General Checkout  
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the troubleshooting procedures in this  
Hardware Maintenance Manual and on the Lenovo Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests  
that you can perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error codes.  
The documentation that comes with your operating system and software also contains troubleshooting  
information.  
Checkout procedure  
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to diagnose a problem in the server.  
About the checkout procedure  
Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems, review the following  
information:  
• Read the safety information that begins on page “Important Safety Information” on page 1.  
• The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major components of the server,  
such as the system board, Ethernet controller, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and  
hard disk drives. You can also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a  
problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the diagnostic programs to confirm  
that the hardware is working correctly.  
• When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than one error message.  
When this happens, correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will not  
occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.  
If multiple error codes or system-board LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the error might be in  
the microprocessor or in the microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 54 for  
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.  
• Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing server is part of a shared  
hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you  
can run all diagnostic programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in the  
storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The failing server might be part of  
a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:  
– You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers sharing external storage  
devices).  
– One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at least one of the attached  
storage units is also attached to another server or unidentifiable device.  
– One or more servers are located near the failing server.  
Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test at a time. Do not run  
any suite of tests, such as “quick” or “normal” tests, because this might enable the hard disk drive  
diagnostic tests.  
• If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see “Event logs” on page 17. If the server  
is halted and no error message is displayed, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 46 and “Solving  
undetermined problems” on page 104.  
• For information about power-supply problems, see “Solving power problems” on page 103.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
13  
       
• For intermittent problems, check the error log; see “Event logs” on page 17 and “Diagnostic programs  
and messages” on page 64.  
Performing the checkout procedure  
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:  
Step 1. Is the server part of a cluster?  
• No: Go to step Step 2 “” on page 14.  
• Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step Step 2 “” on page 14.  
Step 2. Complete the following steps:  
a. Check the power supply LEDs (see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 63).  
b. Turn off the server and all external devices.  
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
d. Check all cables and power cords.  
e. Set all display controls to the middle positions.  
f. Turn on all external devices.  
g. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see “Troubleshooting tables” on page 46.  
h. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel. If it is flashing, check the LEDs  
on the system board (see “System-board LEDs” on page 112).  
i.  
Check for the following results:  
• Successful completion of POST (see “POST” on page 19 for more information)  
• Successful completion of startup  
Diagnosing a problem  
Before you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider, follow these procedures in the order  
in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with your server:  
1. Determine what has changed.  
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced, or updated before the  
problem occurred:  
• Device drivers  
• Server firmware  
• Hardware components  
• Software  
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem occurred.  
2. Collect data.  
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software problems.  
a. Document error codes and system-board LEDs.  
• System error codes: See “POST error codes” on page 19 for information about a specific error  
code.  
• See “System-board LEDs” on page 112 for the location of the system-board LEDs.  
• Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for the software or  
operating system for information about a specific error code. See the manufacturer's Web site for  
documentation.  
14 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
b. Collect system data.  
Run the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) diagnostics program to collect information about the  
hardware, firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information available when you  
contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider. See “Diagnostic programs and messages”  
on page 64 for the instructions to run the DSA program.  
If you need to download the latest version of DSA , go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.  
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they are most likely to solve  
your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in which they are presented:  
a. Check for and apply code updates.  
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually caused by the server  
firmware (formerly BIOS firmware), device firmware, or device drivers that are not at the latest levels.  
1) Determine the existing code levels.  
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click Software to view  
operating-system levels.  
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If  
the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the  
cluster solution before you update the code.  
To display a list of available updates for your server, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a list of the problems that  
the update fixes. Review this list for your specific problem; however, even if your problem is not  
listed, installing the update might solve the problem.  
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.  
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work when you enable it; if you  
make an incorrect change to the server configuration, a system function that has been enabled  
can stop working.  
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.  
See http://www.lenovo.com/support to verify that the server supports the installed operating  
system, optional devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is  
not supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem. You must remove  
nonsupported hardware before you contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider  
for support.  
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are installed and configured  
correctly.  
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal cables or incorrectly seated  
adapters. You might be able to solve the problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables,  
reseating adapters, and turning the server back on. See “Checkout procedure” on page 13 for the  
instructions to perform the checkout procedures.  
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a RAID hard disk drive  
is marked offline in the RAID array), see the documentation for the associated controller and  
management or controlling software to verify that the controller is correctly configured.  
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as RAID and network  
adapters.  
For problems with operating systems or Lenovo software or devices, complete the following steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
a) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
Chapter 3. General Checkout 15  
c) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
d) Click Downloads and drivers .  
e) Click User's guides and manuals to look for related documentation.  
c. Check for service bulletins.Lenovo service bulletins document known problems and suggested  
solutions. To search for service bulletins, complete the following steps.  
1) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
3) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
4) Click Downloads and drivers to look for service information.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.  
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause unpredictable results.  
Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in a system or operating-system log. See  
“Troubleshooting tables” on page 46 and Chapter 6 “Replacing FRUs” on page 115 for more  
information. Hardware errors are also indicated by LEDs on the system board (see “System-board  
LEDs” on page 112 for more information).  
Troubleshooting procedures are also provided on the Lenovo Web site. A single problem might cause  
multiple symptoms. Follow the diagnostic procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that procedure  
does not diagnose the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible. To locate  
troubleshooting procedures for your server, complete the following steps.  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary  
slightly from what is described in this document.  
1) Go to: http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2) From the Select your product list, select Servers and Storage.  
3) In the Browse by product window Family: list, select ThinkServer RS210.  
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.  
5) Under Diagnostic, select the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom that you are observing.  
For more troubleshooting information, see Chapter 4 “Diagnostics” on page 17.  
If the problem remains, contact Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider for assistance  
with additional problem determination and possible hardware replacement. Be prepared to provide  
information about any error codes and collected data.  
Undocumented problems  
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the problem might not have been  
previously identified by Lenovo. After you have verified that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and  
software configurations are valid, and no LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware component failure, contact  
Lenovo or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. Be prepared to provide information about  
any error codes and collected data and the problem determination procedures that you have used.  
16 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Chapter 4. Diagnostics  
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve problems that might occur in  
the server.  
Diagnostic tools  
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related problems:  
• POST error messages and error logs  
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test completion or the  
detection of a problem. See “POST” on page 19, “Event logs” on page 17, and “POST error codes” on  
page 19 for more information.  
• Troubleshooting tables  
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See “Troubleshooting tables”  
on page 46 for more information.  
• Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) Preboot diagnostic programs  
The DSA Preboot diagnostic programs provide problem isolation, configuration analysis, and error log  
collection. The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components of the server  
and are stored in integrated USB memory. The diagnostic programs collect the following information  
about the server:  
– System configuration  
– Network interfaces and settings  
– Installed hardware  
– Service processor status and configuration  
– Vital product data, firmware, and UEFI configuration  
– Hard disk drive health  
– RAID controller configuration  
– Controller and service processor event logs, including the following information:  
– System error logs  
– Temperature, voltage, and fan speed information  
– Self-monitoring Analysis, and Reporting Technology (SMART) data  
– Machine check registers  
– USB information  
– Monitor configuration information  
– PCI slot information  
The diagnostic programs create a merged log that includes events from all collected logs. The information  
is collected into a file that you can send to Lenovo service and support. Additionally, you can view the  
server information locally through a generated text report file. You can also copy the log to removable  
media and view the log from a Web browser. See “Running the diagnostic programs” on page 65 for  
more information.  
• Server LEDs  
Use the LEDs on the server to diagnose system errors quickly. See “System-board LEDs” on page 112  
for more information.  
Event logs  
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
17  
         
• POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and messages that were generated  
during POST. You can view the POST event log through the Setup utility.  
• System-event log: This log contains messages that were generated during POST and all system status  
messages from the service processor. You can view the contents of the system-event log from the  
Setup utility for more information. The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will  
not overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically clear the system-event log through the  
Setup utility. When you are troubleshooting, you might have to clear the system-event log to make the  
most recent events available for analysis.  
Each system-event log entry is displayed on its own page. Message are listed on the left side of the  
screen, and details about the selected message is displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from  
one entry to the next, use the Up Arrow (↑) and Down Arrow (↓) keys.  
The system-event log indicates an assertion event when an event has occurred. It indicates a de-assertion  
event when the event is no longer occurring.  
• Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered subset of all IMM, POST,  
and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web  
interface and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).  
• DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program, and it is a chronologically  
ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM chassis-event log (as the ASM  
event log), and the operating-system event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA program.  
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility  
To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a power-on password and an  
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to view the event logs.  
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:  
• To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.  
• To view the IMM system-event log, select System Event Log.  
Viewing event logs without restarting the server  
When the server is not hung and the IMM is connected to a network, methods are available for you to view  
one or more event logs without having to restart the server.  
You can use the DSA Preboot to view the system event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log (as the  
ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You must restart the server to use DSA Preboot to view those logs.  
You can view the IMM system event log through the Event Log link in the integrated management module  
(IMM) Web interface.  
Table 2. Methods for viewing event logs  
Condition  
Action  
The server is not hung and is connected to a network.  
• Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.  
The server is not hung and is not connected to a network. Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event log.  
18 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Table 2. Methods for viewing event logs (continued)  
Condition  
Action  
The server is hung.  
• If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the server and press  
F2 to start DSA Preboot and view the event logs.  
• If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the DSA Preboot  
CD and restart the server to start DSA Preboot and  
view the event logs.  
• Alternatively, you can restart the server and press F1 to  
start the Setup utility and view the POST event log or  
system-event log. For more information, see “Viewing  
event logs without restarting the server” on page 18.  
Clearing the event logs  
To clear the event logs, complete the following steps.  
Note: The POST event log is automatically cleared each time the server is restarted.  
Step 1. Turn on the server.  
Step 2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a power-on password  
and an administrator password, you must type the administrator password to view the error logs.  
Step 3. Use one of the following procedures:  
• To clear the IMM system-event log, select System Event Logs-->System Event Log. Select  
Clear System Event Log; then, press Enter twice.  
POST  
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of the server components  
and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests is called the power-on self-test, or POST.  
Note: This server does not use beep codes for server status.  
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when you are prompted,  
for POST to run.  
If POST detects a problem, an error message is displayed. See “POST error codes” on page 19 for more  
information.  
POST error codes  
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.  
These errors can appear as severe, warning, or informational.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 19  
       
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0010002  
Microprocessor not supported.  
1. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the  
microprocessor and restart the server.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove the  
microprocessor and install a new microprocessor.  
Restart the server. If the error is corrected, the old  
microprocessor is bad and must be replaced.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time.  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
0011000  
0011004  
Invalid microprocessor type.  
Microprocessor failed BIST.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and  
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED  
is lit) with a supported type (see “Installing the  
microprocessor” on page 141).  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the  
microprocessor.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
001100A  
0050001  
Microcode updated failed.  
DIMM disabled.  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
1. If the server fails the POST memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
memory module” on page 125 and “Installing a  
memory module” on page 125).  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running  
the diagnostic programs” on page 65).  
20 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0051003  
Uncorrectable DIMM error  
1. If the server failed the POST memory test, reseat  
the DIMMs.  
2. Remove and replace any DIMM for which the  
associated error LED is lit (see “Removing a  
memory module” on page 125 and “Installing a  
memory module” on page 125).  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA Preboot memory test (see “Running  
the diagnostic programs” on page 65).  
0051006  
0051009  
DIMM mismatch detected  
No memory detected.  
Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed  
in the correct sequence (see “Installing a memory  
module” on page 125).  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
“Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
005100A  
0058001  
No usable memory detected.  
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs.  
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see  
“Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory  
connectors (see “System-board switches and  
jumpers” on page 111).  
PFA threshold exceeded  
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see  
“Running the diagnostic programs” on page 65).  
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a  
lit LED on the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 21  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
0058007  
DIMM population is unsupported.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those  
that are identified and replace it with an identical  
pair of known good DIMMs, then restart the server.  
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to  
their original connectors, restarting the server after  
each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the DIMMs in  
the failed pair with identical known good DIMMs,  
restarting the server after each DIMM is installed.  
Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat this step until you  
have tested all removed DIMMs.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
0058008  
DIMM failed memory test.  
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.  
2. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, then restart the server after each:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
00580A4  
0068002  
Memory population changed.  
CMOS battery cleared.  
Information only. Memory has been added, moved,  
or changed.  
1. Reseat the battery.  
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see System board  
jumpers).  
3. Replace the following components one at a time,  
in the following order, restarting the server after  
each one:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
2011001  
PCI-X PERR  
1. Check the riser-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.  
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Riser card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
22 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected error 1. Check the riser-card LEDs.  
2. Reseat all affected adapters and riser cards.  
Action  
2018001  
3. Update the PCI adapter firmware.  
4. Remove the adapter from the riser card.  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Riser card  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
2018002  
Informational message that some devices might not  
be initialized.  
Option ROM resource allocation failure  
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters  
in the PCI slots to change the load order of the  
optional-device ROM code.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Startup Options, and  
change the boot priority to change the load order  
of the optional-device ROM code.  
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other  
resources, if their functions are not being used, to  
make more space available.  
a. Select Startup Options → Planar Ethernet  
(PXE/DHCP) to disable the integrated Ethernet  
controller ROM.  
b. Select Advanced Functions → PCI Bus  
Control → PCI ROM Control Execution to  
disable the ROM of the adapter in the PCI slots.  
c. Select Devices and I/O Ports to disable any of  
the integrated devices.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Each adapter  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3xx0007 (xx  
can be 00 -  
19)  
Firmware fault detected, system halted  
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.  
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear  
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the default  
values (see System board jumpers).  
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.  
3038003  
Firmware corrupted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings to recover the server  
firmware.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 23  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3048005  
Information message that the backup UEFI settings  
are used.  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image  
3048006  
305000A  
Booted secondary (backup) UEFI image  
because of ABR  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings to recover the primary UEFI  
settings.  
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power  
source.  
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, then  
turn on the server.  
RTC date/time is incorrect  
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup  
utility, and then restart the server.  
2. Reseat the battery.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Battery  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3058001  
System configuration invalid  
1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. Battery  
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must be  
replaced by a trained service technician only)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
3058004  
Three boot failure  
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new  
settings or newly installed devices.  
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable  
power source.  
3. Make sure that the operating system is not  
corrupted.  
4. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and  
then restart the server.  
5. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
3108007  
3138002  
Information only. This message is usually associated  
with the CMOS battery clear event.  
System configuration restored to default  
settings  
Boot configuration error  
1. Remove any recent configuration changes made  
to the Setup utility.  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
24 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3808000  
IMM communication failure  
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds, and  
then reconnect the server to power and restart it.  
2. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated and  
not damaged.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3808002  
3808003  
3808004  
Error updating system configuration to IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then reconnect  
the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
Error retrieving system configuration from  
IMM  
1. Remove power from the server, and then reconnect  
the server to power and restart it.  
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.  
3. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
IMM system event log full  
• When using out-of-band, use the IMM Web  
interface or IPMItool to clear the logs from the  
operating system.  
• When using the local console:  
1. Run the Setup utility.  
2. Select System Event Log.  
3. Select Clear System Event Log.  
4. Restart the server.  
3818001  
3818002  
3818003  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
update aborted  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
flash lock failed  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 25  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Error code  
Description  
Action  
3818004  
Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)  
system error  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818005  
3818006  
Current Bank Core Root of Trust Measurement 1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
(CRTM) capsule signature invalid  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature  
invalid  
1. Switch the server firmware bank to the backup  
bank (see “Starting the backup server firmware”  
on page 212).  
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
3. Switch the bank back to the primary bank.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
3818007  
3828004  
CRTM update capsule signature invalid  
AEM power capping disabled  
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default Settings,  
and save the settings.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
1. Check the settings and the event logs.  
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager feature  
is enabled in the Setup utility. Click System  
Settings → Power → Active Energy Manager →  
Capping Enabled .  
3. Update the server firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
4. Update the IMM firmware to the latest level (see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211).  
System-event log  
The system-event log contains messages of three types:  
26 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Information  
Warning  
Information messages do not require action; they  
record significant system-level events, such as  
when the server is started.  
Warning messages do not require immediate action;  
they indicate possible problems, such as when the  
recommended maximum ambient temperature is  
exceeded.  
Error  
Error messages might require action; they indicate  
system errors, such as when a fan is not detected.  
Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of the message (POST  
or the IMM).  
Integrated management module error messages  
The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to correct the detected  
problems.  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
Severity  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going Error  
high (upper non-recoverable) has  
asserted.  
An upper nonrecoverable  
sensor going high has  
asserted.  
Reduce the ambient temperature.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going  
low has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going  
high (upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going low  
(lower critical) has asserted.  
A lower critical sensor going  
low has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going high Error  
(upper critical) has asserted.  
An upper critical sensor  
going high has asserted.  
(Trained service technician only)  
Replace the system board.  
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going  
low (lower critical) has asserted.  
Error  
A lower critical sensor going Replace the 3 V battery.  
low has asserted.  
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going low Error  
(lower critical) has asserted.(n = fan  
number)  
A lower critical sensor going 1. Reseat the failing fan n,  
low has asserted.  
which is indicated by a lit  
LED on the system board (see  
“System-board LEDs” on page  
112).  
2. Replace the failing fan.  
(n = fan number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 27  
 
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A processor failed - IERR  
condition has occurred.  
1. Make sure that the latest levels  
of firmware and device drivers  
are installed for all adapters  
and standard devices, such as  
Ethernet, SCSI, and SAS.  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
Failed with IERR.(n = microprocessor  
number)  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. Run the DSA program for the  
hard disk drives and other I/O  
devices.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
An overtemperature  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffle is in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
An Over-Temperature Condition has  
been detected on the Processor CPU  
nStatus.(n = microprocessor number)  
condition has occurred  
for microprocessor n.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat  
sink for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
28 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A processor failed -  
FRB1/BIST condition has  
occurred.  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Error  
Error  
A processor configuration  
mismatch has occurred.  
The Processor CPU nStatus has  
a Configuration Mismatch.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
1. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the  
microprocessor.  
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU  
complex error for Processor  
CPU nStatus has asserted.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
An SMBIOS uncorrectable  
CPU complex error has  
asserted.  
1. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Reseat microprocessor  
n.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 29  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
Error  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffle is in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.(n = microprocessor  
number)  
2. Make sure that the heat  
sink for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state from a  
less severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffle is in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable  
from a less severe state.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat  
sink for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
A sensor has changed  
to Critical state from  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffle is in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to critical from  
a non-recoverable state.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat  
sink for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
30 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Nonrecoverable state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffle is in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has  
transitioned to non-recoverable.(n =  
microprocessor number)  
2. Make sure that the heat  
sink for microprocessor n is  
installed correctly.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
n.  
(n = microprocessor number)  
A bus timeout has occurred  
on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
Error  
A bus timeout has occurred. 1. Remove the adapter from the  
PCI slot that is indicated by a  
lit LED.  
2. Replace the extender card.  
3. Remove all PCI adapters.  
4. (Trained service technicians  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Error  
1. Recover the server firmware  
from the backup page (see  
“Recovering the server  
The System %1 encountered  
a POST Error.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A POST error has  
occurred.(Sensor = ABR  
Status)  
firmware” on page 100).  
2. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 31  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
1. Update the server firmware on  
the primary page.  
The System %1 encountered  
a POST Error.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A POST error has  
occurred.(Sensor = Firmware  
Error)  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.(Sensor =  
Critical Int PCI)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.  
3. Remove the adapter from the  
indicated PCI slot.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
32 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.(Sensor =  
Critical Int CPU)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the microprocessor  
error LEDs.  
3. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace microprocessor  
.
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
A Uncorrectable Bus Error has  
occurred on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
Error  
A bus uncorrectable error  
has occurred.(Sensor =  
Critical Int DIM)  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.  
3. Remove the failing DIMM from  
the system board.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
5. Make sure that the installed  
DIMMs are supported and  
configured correctly.  
6. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 33  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
Sensor Sys Board Fault has  
transitioned to critical from a less  
severe state.  
1. Check the system-event log.  
2. Check for an error LED on the  
system board.  
3. Replace any failing device.  
4. Check for a server firmware  
update.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Error  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned to  
critical from a less severe state.  
1. Check the hard disk drive  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for  
which the status LED is lit.  
3. Replace the defective hard  
disk drive.  
Error  
Error  
A drive has been removed.  
The Drive n Status has been removed  
from unit Drive 0 Status.(n = hard disk  
drive number)  
Reseat hard disk drive n.(n = hard  
disk drive number)  
A drive has been disabled  
because of a fault.  
1. Run the hard disk drive  
The Drive n Status has been disabled  
due to a detected fault.(n = hard disk  
drive number)  
diagnostic test on drive n.  
2. Reseat the following  
components:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
3. Replace the following  
components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the  
server each time:  
a. Hard disk drive  
b. Cable from the system  
board to the backplane  
c. Hard disk drive backplane  
(n = hard disk drive number)  
34 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
Replace the hard disk drive that is  
indicated by a lit status LED.  
Array %1 is in critical condition.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
An array is in Critical  
state.(Sensor = Drive n  
Status)(n = hard disk drive  
number)  
Error  
An array is in Failed  
state.(Sensor = Drive n  
Status)(n = hard disk drive  
number)  
Replace the hard disk drive that is  
indicated by a lit status LED.  
Array %1 has failed.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached  
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem All DIMMs.  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the  
DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for All DIMMs on Memory Subsystem  
All DIMMs.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 35  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on  
Memory Subsystem One of the  
DIMMs.  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached for  
DIMM One of the DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the  
DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for One of the DIMMs on Memory  
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.  
Memory uncorrectable error detected Error  
for DIMM n Status on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM n Status.(n = DIMM  
number)  
A memory uncorrectable  
error has occurred.  
1. If the server failed the POST  
memory test, reseat the  
DIMMs.  
2. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Note: You do not have to  
replace DIMMs by pairs.  
3. Run the Setup utility to enable  
all the DIMMs.  
4. Run the DSA memory test.  
5. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
36 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Memory Logging Limit Reached  
for DIMM nStatus on Memory  
Subsystem DIMMnStatus.(n = DIMM  
number)  
Error  
The memory logging limit  
has been reached.  
1. Update the server firmware to  
the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the  
DSA memory test.  
3. Replace any DIMM that is  
indicated by a lit error LED.  
Error  
Error  
A DIMM configuration error  
has occurred.  
Make sure that DIMMs are  
installed in the correct sequence  
and have the same size, type,  
speed, and technology.  
Memory DIMM Configuration Error  
for DIMM nStatus on Memory  
Subsystem DIMM nStatus.(n = DIMM  
number)  
A sensor has changed to  
Critical state from a less  
severe state.  
1. Make sure that the fans are  
operating, that there are no  
obstructions to the airflow, that  
the air baffles are in place and  
correctly installed, and that  
the server cover is installed  
and completely closed.  
Sensor DIMM n Temp has transitioned  
to critical from a less severe state.(n  
= DIMM number)  
2. If a fan has failed, complete  
the action for a fan failure.  
3. Replace DIMM n.  
(n = DIMM number)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 37  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A PCI PERR has occurred  
on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has  
occurred.(Sensor = PCI  
Slot n; n = PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and adapter  
firmware (UEFI and IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
Error  
A PCI SERR has occurred  
on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has  
occurred.(Sensor = PCI  
Slot n; n = PCI slot number)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and adapter  
firmware (UEFI and IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
4. Remove the adapter from slot  
n.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace extender card n.  
(n = PCI slot number)  
38 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
A PCI PERR has occurred  
on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A PCI PERR has  
occurred.(Sensor = One  
of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and riser card.  
3. Update the server and adapter  
firmware (UEFI and IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Error  
A PCI SERR has occurred  
on system %1.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
A PCI SERR has  
occurred.(Sensor = One  
of PCI Err)  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and adapter  
firmware (UEFI and IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 39  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
Fault in slot System board  
on system %1.(%1 =  
1. Check the extender-card  
LEDs.  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
2. Reseat the affected adapters  
and extender card.  
3. Update the server and adapter  
firmware (UEFI and IMM).  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
4. Remove both adapters.  
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.  
6. Replace the extender card.  
7. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Error  
Redundancy has been lost  
and is insufficient to continue  
operation.  
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has  
been reduced.  
1. Check the system-event  
log for DIMM failure events  
(uncorrectable or PFA) and  
correct the failures.  
2. Re-enable mirroring in the  
Setup utility.  
An IMM network has  
completed initialization.  
No action; information only.  
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info  
Error  
A problem has occurred with 1. Make sure that the certificate  
Certificate Authority %1 has detected  
a %2 Certificate Error.(%1 =  
the SSL Server, SSL Client,  
or SSL Trusted CA certificate  
that has been imported  
into the IMM. The imported  
certificate must contain a  
public key that corresponds  
to the key pair that was  
previously generated by  
the Generate a New Key  
and Certificate Signing  
Request link.  
that you are importing is  
correct.  
IBM_CertificateAuthority.CADistinguishedName;  
%2 =  
CIM_PublicKeyCertificate.ElementName)  
2. Try importing the certificate  
again.  
Ethernet Data Rate modified from  
%1 to %2 by user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.Speed; %2 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.Speed; %3 = user  
ID)  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port data rate.  
No action; information only.  
40 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex; %2 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex; %3 =  
user ID)  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port duplex setting.  
No action; information only.  
Ethernet MTU setting modified from  
%1 to %2 by user %3.(%1 =  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MTU setting.  
No action; information only.  
CIM_EthernetPort.ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;  
%2 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;  
%3 = user ID)  
Ethernet Duplex setting modified  
from %1 to %2 by user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.NetworkAddresses;  
%2 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.NetworkAddresses;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has modified the  
Ethernet port MAC address  
setting.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
Ethernet interface %1  
by user %2.(%1 =  
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState;  
%2 = user ID)  
Info  
Info  
Info  
A user has enabled or  
disabled the Ethernet  
interface.  
Hostname set to %1  
by user %2.(%1 =  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.Hostname;  
%2 = user ID)  
A user has modified the host No action; information only.  
name of the IMM.  
IP address of network  
interface modified from %1  
to %2 by user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.IPv4Address;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.IPAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
A user has modified the IP  
address of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
IP subnet mask of network  
interface modified from %1  
to %2 by user %3s.(%1 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.SubnetMask;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.SubnetMask;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has modified the IP  
subnet mask of the IMM.  
IP address of default  
gateway modified from %1  
to %2 by user %3s.(%1 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.GatewayIPv4Address;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPAssignmentSettingData.DefaultGatewayAddress;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has modified the  
default gateway IP address  
of the IMM.  
Info  
A user has enabled or  
disabled an OS Watchdog.  
OS Watchdog response %1 by  
%2.(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2  
= user ID)  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 41  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address  
assigned.(%1 = IP address,  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
Info  
A DHCP server has failed to  
assign an IP address to the  
IMM.  
1. Make sure that the network  
cable is connected.  
2. Make sure that there is a  
DHCP server on the network  
that can assign an IP address  
to the IMM.  
Remote Login Successful. Login  
ID: %1 from %2 at IP address  
%3.(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
Info  
A user has successfully  
logged in to the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.ProtocolIFType;  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
Attempting to %1 server %2 by  
user %3.(%1 = Power Up, Power  
Down, Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =  
IBM_ComputerSystem.ElementName;  
%3 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has used the IMM to  
perform a power function on  
the server.  
No action; information only.  
Error  
A user has exceeded  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2  
login failures from WEB client at IP  
address %3.(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
the maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
from a Web browser and has  
been prevented from logging  
in for the lockout period.  
2. Have the system administrator  
reset the login ID or password.  
Error  
A user has exceeded  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
Security: Login ID: '%1' had  
%2 login failures from CLI  
at %3.(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
the maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
from the command-line  
interface and has been  
prevented from logging in for  
the lockout period.  
2. Have the system administrator  
reset the login ID or password.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is '%1' from WEB browser at IP  
address %2.(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP  
address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct  
in from a Web browser by  
using an invalid login ID or  
password.  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
2. Have the system administrator  
reset the login ID or password.  
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid Error  
userid or password received. Userid  
is '%1' from TELNET client at IP  
address %2.(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP  
address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
A user has attempted to log 1. Make sure that the correct  
in from a Telnet session by  
using an invalid login ID or  
password.  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
2. Have the system administrator  
reset the login ID or password.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 cleared by user %2.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName;  
%2 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has cleared the IMM  
event log.  
No action; information only.  
IMM reset was initiated by user  
%1.(%1 = user ID)  
Info  
A user has initiated a reset  
of the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
42 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1,  
DN=%2, IP@=%3, SN=%4,  
GW@=%5, DNS1@=%6.(%1 =  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.Hostname;  
%2 =  
Info  
The DHCP server has  
assigned an IMM IP address  
and configuration.  
No action; information only.  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.DomainName;  
%3 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.IPv4Address;  
%4 =  
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.SubnetMask;  
%5 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6  
= IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
Info  
An IMM IP address and  
configuration have been  
assigned using client data.  
No action; information only.  
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1,  
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3,  
GW@=%4.(%1 =  
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.Hostname;  
%2 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.IPv4Address;  
%3 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.SubnetMask;  
%4 =  
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.DefaultGatewayAddress)  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no longer Info  
active.  
The IMM Ethernet interface  
has been disabled.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
No action; information only.  
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now  
active.  
Info  
The IMM Ethernet interface  
has been enabled.  
Info  
A user has changed the  
DHCP mode.  
DHCP setting changed to by user  
%1.(%1 = user ID)  
A user has restored the IMM No action; information only.  
configuration by importing a  
configuration file.  
IMM: Configuration %1 restored from Info  
a configuration file by user %2.(%1 =  
CIM_ConfigurationData.ConfigurationName;  
%2 = user ID)  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the screen  
capture was successful.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture  
Occurred.(%1 = OS Watchdog or  
Loader Watchdog)  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for the  
operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 43  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
An operating-system error  
has occurred, and the screen  
capture failed.  
1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
timer to a higher value.  
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture  
Screen.(%1 = OS Watchdog or  
Loader Watchdog)  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for the  
operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
6. Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part  
of a cluster solution, verify  
that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster  
solution before you update the  
code.  
Running the backup IMM main  
application.  
Error  
The IMM has resorted to  
running the backup main  
application.  
Update the IMM firmware.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of  
a cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before you  
update the code.  
Please ensure that the IMM is flashed Error  
with the correct firmware. The IMM is  
unable to match its firmware to the  
server.  
The server does not support Update the IMM firmware to a  
the installed IMM firmware  
version.  
version that the server supports.  
Important: Some cluster  
solutions require specific code  
levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of  
a cluster solution, verify that the  
latest level of code is supported  
for the cluster solution before you  
update the code.  
IMM reset was caused by restoring  
default values.  
Info  
Info  
The IMM has been reset  
because a user has restored  
the configuration to its  
default settings.  
No action; information only.  
IMM clock has been set  
from NTP server %1.(%1 =  
IBM_NTPService.ElementName)  
The IMM clock has been set No action; information only.  
to the date and time that  
is provided by the Network  
Time Protocol server.  
44 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Error  
Info  
Info  
There is a problem with the  
certificate that has been  
imported into the IMM. The  
imported certificate must  
contain a public key that  
corresponds to the key  
pair that was previously  
generated through the  
Generate a New Key  
and Certificate Signing  
Request link.  
1. Make sure that the certificate  
that you are importing is  
correct.  
SSL data in the IMM configuration  
data is invalid. Clearing configuration  
data region and disabling SSL+H25.  
2. Try to import the certificate  
again.  
Flash of %1 from %2  
A user has successfully  
updated one of the following  
firmware components:  
No action; information only.  
succeeded for user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_ManagedElement.ElementName;  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI; %3  
= user ID)  
• IMM main application  
• IMM boot ROM  
• Server firmware  
• Diagnostics  
• Integrated service  
processor  
Flash of %1 from %2  
failed for user %3.(%1 =  
CIM_ManagedElement.ElementName;  
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI; %3  
= user ID)  
An attempt to update a  
firmware component from  
the interface and IP address  
has failed.  
Try to update the firmware again.  
Info  
Info  
Error  
The IMM event log is 75%  
full. When the log is full,  
older log entries are replaced  
by newer ones.  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
clear the log.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 75% full.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
The IMM event log is full.  
When the log is full, older  
log entries are replaced by  
newer ones.  
To avoid losing older log entries,  
save the log as a text file and  
clear the log.  
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on  
system %1 is 100% full.(%1 =  
CIM_ComputerSystem.ElementName)  
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer  
expired for %2.(%1 = OS Watchdog  
or Loader Watchdog; %2 = OS  
Watchdog or Loader Watchdog)  
A Platform Watchdog Timer 1. Reconfigure the watchdog  
Expired event has occurred.  
timer to a higher value.  
2. Make sure that the IMM  
Ethernet over USB interface is  
enabled.  
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or  
cdc_ether device driver for the  
operating system.  
4. Disable the watchdog.  
5. Check the integrity of the  
installed operating system.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 45  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
A user has generated a test  
alert from the IMM.  
No action; information only.  
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1.(%1 Info  
= user ID)  
Error  
A user has exceeded  
1. Make sure that the correct  
login ID and password are  
being used.  
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login  
failures from an SSH client at IP  
address %3.(%1 = user ID; %2 =  
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures  
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);  
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)  
the maximum number of  
unsuccessful login attempts  
from SSH and has been  
prevented from logging in for  
the lockout period.  
2. Have the system administrator  
reset the login ID or password.  
Troubleshooting tables  
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable symptoms.  
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not working, do the following  
before using the troubleshooting tables:  
1. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel to see if it is lit.  
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.  
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.  
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.  
EasyStartup problems  
Table 3. EasyStartup DVD  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Action  
Symptom  
The EasyStartup DVD  
will not start.  
• Make sure the server supports the EasyStartup program and has a startable (bootable)  
DVD drive.  
• If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure the DVD drive  
is first in the startup sequence.  
• If more than one DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is set as the  
primary drive. Start the EasyStartup DVD from the primary DVD drive.  
The operating-system  
installation program  
continuously loops.  
Make more space available on the hard disk.  
The EasyStartup  
program will not start  
the operating-system  
media.  
Make sure that the operating-system media is supported by the EasyStartup program.  
See the EasyStartup User Guide for a list of supported operating-system versions. The  
EasyStartup User Guide and compatibility notes are available through the EasyStartup  
program.  
46 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
DVD drive problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The optical drive is not  
recognized.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The SATA connector to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or secondary)  
is enabled in the Setup utility.  
• All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.  
• The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Reseat the following components:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive interface board cable  
c. DVD interface board  
d. (Trained service technician only) System board  
A CD or DVD is not working  
correctly.  
1. Clean the CD or DVD.  
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.  
3. Check the connector and signal cable for bent pins or damage.  
4. Reseat the following components:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DVD drive  
b. DVD drive cable  
The DVD drive tray is not  
working.  
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.  
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release opening.  
3. Reseat the DVD drive.  
4. Replace the DVD drive.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 47  
 
General problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A cover lock is broken, an LED  
is not working, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a  
trained service technician.  
Hard disk drive problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A hard disk drive has failed,  
and the associated amber hard  
disk drive status LED is lit.  
Replace the failed hard disk drive (see “Replacing hard disk drives” on page 126).  
48 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A newly installed hard disk  
drive is not recognized.  
1. Observe the associated amber hard disk drive status LED. If the LED is lit, it  
indicates a drive fault.  
2. If the LED is lit, remove the drive from the bay, wait 45 seconds, and reinsert  
the drive, making sure that the drive assembly connects to the hard disk drive  
backplane.  
3. Observe the associated green hard disk drive activity LED and the amber status  
LED:  
• If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is not lit, the  
drive is recognized by the controller and is working correctly. Run the DSA  
hard disk drive test to determine whether the drive is detected.  
• If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is flashing  
slowly, the drive is recognized by the controller and is rebuilding.  
• If neither LED is lit or flashing, check the hard disk drive backplane (go to  
step 4 on page 49).  
• If the green activity LED is flashing and the amber status LED is lit, replace the  
drive. If the activity of the LEDs remains the same, go to step 4 on page 49. If  
the activity of the LEDs changes, return to step 1 on page 49.  
4. Make sure that the hard disk drive backplane is correctly seated. When it is  
correctly seated, the drive assemblies correctly connect to the backplane without  
bowing or causing movement of the backplane.  
5. Reseat the backplane power cable and repeat steps 1 on page 49 through 3  
on page 49.  
6. Reseat the backplane signal cable and repeat steps 1 on page 49 through 3  
on page 49.  
7. Suspect the backplane signal cable or the backplane:  
• Replace the affected backplane signal cable.  
• Replace the affected backplane.  
8. Run the diagnostic tests for the SAS/SATA controller and hard disk drives (see  
“Diagnostic tools” on page 17).  
• If the controller passes the test but the drives are not recognized, replace the  
backplane signal cable and run the tests again.  
• Replace the backplane.  
• If the controller fails the test, disconnect the backplane signal cable from  
the controller and run the tests again.  
• If the controller fails the test, replace the controller.  
9. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104..  
Multiple hard disk drives fail.  
Make sure that the hard disk drive, SAS/SATA RAID controller, and server device  
drivers and firmware are at the latest level.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code  
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code  
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 49  
     
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
Multiple hard disk drives are  
offline.  
1. Review the storage subsystem logs for indications of problems within the storage  
subsystem, such as backplane or cable problems.  
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
A replacement hard disk drive  
does not rebuild.  
1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is recognized by the controller (the green  
hard disk drive activity LED is flashing).  
2. Review the SAS/SATA RAID controller documentation to determine the correct  
configuration parameters and settings.  
A green hard disk drive activity 1. If the green hard disk drive activity LED does not flash when the drive is in use,  
LED does not accurately  
represent the actual state of  
the associated drive.  
run the DSA disk drive test (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 17.  
2. Use one of the following procedures:  
• If the drive passes the test, replace the backplane.  
• If the drive fails the test, replace the drive.  
An amber hard disk drive  
status LED does not accurately  
represent the actual state of  
the associated drive.  
1. If the amber hard disk drive LED and the RAID controller software do not indicate  
the same status for the drive, complete the following steps:  
a. Turn off the server.  
b. Reseat the SAS/SATA controller.  
c. Reseat the backplane signal cable and backplane power cable.  
d. Reseat the hard disk drive.  
e. Turn on the server and observe the activity of the hard disk drive LEDs.  
2. See “Problem determination tips” on page 104.  
Hypervisor problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
If an optional embedded  
hypervisor flash device is not  
listed in the expected boot  
order, does not appear in the  
list of boot devices, or a similar  
problem has occurred.  
1. Make sure that the optional embedded hypervisor flash device is selected on the  
boot manager (<F12> Select Boot Device) at startup.  
2. Make sure that the embedded hypervisor flash device is seated in the connector  
correctly (see “Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page 133.  
3. See the documentation that comes with the optional embedded hypervisor flash  
device for setup and configuration information.  
4. Make sure that other software works on the server.  
50 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Intermittent problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A problem occurs only  
occasionally and is difficult to  
diagnose.  
1. Make sure that:  
• All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and  
attached devices.  
• When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no  
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and  
shut down.  
2. Check the system-error log or IMM system event log (see “POST” on page 19).  
The server resets (restarts)  
occasionally.  
1. If the reset occurs during POST and the POST watchdog timer is enabled (click  
System Settings --> Integrated Management Module --> POST Watchdog  
Timer in the UEFI Setup Utility program to see the POST watchdog setting),  
make sure that sufficient time is allowed in the watchdog timeout value (POST  
Watchdog Timer). If the server continues to reset during POST, see “POST”  
on page 19.  
2. If the reset occurs after the operating system starts, disable any automatic server  
restart (ASR) utilities or ASR devices that may be installed.  
Note: ASR utilities operate as operating-system utilities and are related to the  
IPMI device driver. If the reset continues to occur after the operating system  
starts, the operating system might have a problem; see “Software problems”  
on page 60.  
3. If neither condition applies, check the system-error log or IMM system event  
log (see “POST” on page 19).  
If the problem remains, call for service.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 51  
 
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
All or some keys on the  
keyboard do not work.  
1. Make sure that the keyboard cable is securely connected.  
2. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect  
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Keyboard  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
1. Make sure that:  
The mouse or pointing device  
does not work.  
• The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.  
• The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.  
• The server and the monitor are turned on.  
• The mouse option is enabled in the Setup utility.  
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB  
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it  
directly to the server.  
3. Move the mouse or pointing device cable to another USB connector.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Mouse or pointing device  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
52 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Memory problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The amount of system memory 1. Make sure that:  
that is displayed is less than  
• No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel.  
the amount of installed physical  
memory.  
• The memory modules are seated correctly.  
• You have installed the correct type of memory.  
• All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically  
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem.  
2. Check the POST error log:  
• If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace  
the DIMM.  
3. Run memory diagnostics (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 17).  
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the minimum  
memory configuration.  
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair match.  
6. Reseat the DIMM.  
7. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board  
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.  
2. Replace the failing DIMM.  
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a  
branch are identified as failing.  
3. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 53  
 
Microprocessor problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A microprocessor LED is lit  
during POST, indicating that  
the microprocessor is not  
working correctly.  
1. Make sure that the server supports the microprocessor.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Make sure that the microprocessor is seated  
correctly.  
3. (Trained the service technician only) Reseat the microprocessor.  
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Monitor problems  
Some monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your monitor, see the documentation  
that comes with the monitor for instructions for testing and adjusting the monitor. If you cannot diagnose  
the problem, call for service.  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
Testing the monitor.  
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.  
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being  
tested on a different server.  
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs, the  
problem might be a video device driver.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
54 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The screen is blank.  
1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it  
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the  
correct connector on the rear of the server.  
2. Make sure that:  
• The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see “Power  
problems” on page 58.  
• The monitor cables are connected correctly.  
• The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are adjusted  
correctly.  
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.  
4. Make sure that damaged server firmware is not affecting the video; see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
5. Observe the checkpoint LEDs on the system board; if the codes are changing,  
go to step 6.  
6. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. Monitor  
b. Video PCI card (if one is installed)  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
7. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 104.  
1. Make sure that:  
The monitor works when  
you turn on the server, but  
the screen goes blank when  
you start some application  
programs.  
• The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than  
the capability of the monitor.  
• You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.  
2. Run video diagnostics (see “Diagnostic tools” on page 17).  
• If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see “Solving  
undetermined problems” on page 104.  
• (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,  
replace the system board.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 55  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The monitor has screen  
jitter, or the screen image is  
wavy, unreadable, rolling, or  
distorted.  
1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider  
the location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as  
transformers, appliances, fluorescents, and other monitors) can cause screen  
jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,  
turn off the monitor.  
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen  
discoloration.  
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on  
the monitor.  
Notes:  
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance  
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3 in.).  
b. Non-Lenovo monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.  
2. Reseat the monitor cable.  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time:  
a. Monitor cable  
b. Video PCI card (if one is installed)  
c. Monitor  
d. (Trained service technician only) System board  
Wrong characters appear on  
the screen.  
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the UEFI code (see “Updating the  
firmware” on page 211) with the correct language.  
2. Reseat the monitor cable.  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time:  
a. Monitor cable  
b. Monitor  
c. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
56 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Optional-device problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
An optional device that was  
just installed does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The device is designed for the server.  
• You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the  
device is installed correctly.  
• You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.  
• You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever  
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.  
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.  
3. Replace the device that you just installed.  
An optional device that worked 1. Make sure that all of the cable connections for the device are secure.  
previously does not work now.  
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the  
device.  
3. Reseat the failing device.  
4. Replace the failing device.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 57  
 
Power problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power-control button does 1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:  
not work, and the reset button  
does work (the server does not  
start).  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
Note: The power-control  
button will not function until  
approximately 1 to 3 minutes  
after the server has been  
connected to ac power.  
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel cables,  
and then repeat steps 1a and 1b.  
• (Trained service technician only) If the server starts, reseat the operator  
information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator information  
panel.  
• If the server does not start, bypass the power-control button by using the  
force power-on jumper (see “System-board switches and jumpers” on  
page 111). If the server starts, reseat the operator information panel. If the  
problem remains, replace the operator information panel.  
2. Make sure that the reset button is working correctly:  
a. Disconnect the server power cords.  
b. Reconnect the power cords.  
3. Make sure that:  
• The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working  
electrical outlet.  
• The type of memory that is installed is correct.  
• The DIMMs are fully seated.  
• The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.  
• (Trained service technician only) The microprocessor is correctly installed.  
4. Reseat the following components:  
a. DIMMs  
b. (Trained service technician only) Power-supply cables to all internal  
components  
c. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector  
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting  
the server each time:  
a. DIMMs  
b. Power supply  
c. (Trained service technician only) System board  
6. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the  
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply  
supports.  
7. See “Power-supply LEDs” on page 63.  
8. See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 104.  
58 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The server does not turn off.  
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power Interface  
(ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI operating  
system, complete the following steps:  
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.  
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button and hold it down  
for 5 seconds.  
c. Restart the server.  
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,  
disconnect the ac power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the ac power  
cord and restart the server.  
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,  
suspect the system board.  
The server unexpectedly shuts  
down, and the LEDs on the  
operator information panel are  
not lit.  
See “Solving undetermined problems” on page 104.  
Serial-device problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
The number of serial ports that 1. Make sure that:  
are identified by the operating  
system is less than the number  
of installed serial ports.  
• Each port is assigned a unique address in the UEFI Setup Utility program and  
none of the serial ports is disabled.  
• The serial-port (if one is present) is seated correctly.  
2. Reseat the serial port PCI card.  
3. Replace the serial port PCI card.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 59  
 
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A serial device does not work.  
1. Make sure that:  
• The device is compatible with the server.  
• The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.  
• The device is connected to the correct connector (see “System-board  
switches and jumpers” on page 111).  
2. Reseat the following components:  
a. Failing serial device  
b. Serial cable  
3. Replace the components listed in step 2 one at a time, in the order shown,  
restarting the server each time.  
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.  
Software problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
You suspect a software  
problem.  
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:  
• The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For  
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If  
you have just installed an optional device or memory, the server might have  
a memory-address conflict.  
• The software is designed to operate on the server.  
• Other software works on the server.  
• The software works on another server.  
2. If you received any error messages when using the software, see the information  
that comes with the software for a description of the messages and suggested  
solutions to the problem.  
3. Contact the software vendor.  
60 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Symptom  
Action  
A USB device does not work.  
1. Run USB diagnostics (see “POST” on page 19).  
2. Make sure that:  
• The correct USB device driver is installed.  
• The operating system supports USB devices.  
3. Make sure that the USB configuration options are set correctly in the Setup Utility  
(see “Using the Setup Utility” on page 197 for more information).  
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and  
connect it directly to the server.  
Video problems  
See “Monitor problems” on page 54.  
Error LEDs  
The illustration shows the system-board LEDs. The system board has error LEDs that will help to locate  
the source of the error. Run the diagnostic programs to find out the cause of the error (see “Running the  
diagnostic programs” on page 65).  
New graphic to be added in the next draft.  
The server is designed so that LEDs remain lit when the server is connected to an ac power source but is  
not turned on, provided that the power supply is operating correctly. This feature helps you to isolate the  
problem when the operating system is shut down.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs because  
the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power source, make  
a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information panel and LEDs  
inside the server on the system board.  
Many errors are first indicated by a lit system-error LED on the control-panel assembly of the server. If this  
LED is lit, one or more LEDs elsewhere in the server might also be lit and can direct you to the source  
of the error.  
Before you work inside the server to view the LEDs, read the safety information that begins on page  
“Important Safety Information” on page 1.  
If an error occurs, view the server LEDs in the following order:  
1. Check the control-panel assembly on the front of the server. If the system-error LED is lit, it indicates that  
an error has occurred.  
2. Check the front and rear of the server to determine whether any component LEDs are lit.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 61  
     
3. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain components inside the server  
have LEDs that will be lit to indicate the location of a problem. For example, a DIMM error will light  
the LED next to the failing DIMM on the system board. Look at the system service label inside the  
side cover of the server, which gives an overview of internal components. This information can often  
provide enough information to correct the error.  
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and PCI extender cards and suggested actions  
to correct the detected problems.  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Component LED  
Description  
Action  
DIMM error LEDs  
A memory DIMM has failed or is  
incorrectly installed.  
1. Remove the DIMM that has the lit error LED.  
2. Reseat the DIMM.  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. DIMM  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
CPU error LEDs  
Microprocessor has failed, is  
missing, or has been incorrectly  
installed.  
Note: (Trained service technician  
only) Make sure that the  
microprocessor is installed  
correctly; see “Installing the  
microprocessor” on page 141.  
1. Check the system-event log to determine the reason  
for the lit LED.  
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing  
microprocessor  
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in  
the order shown, restarting the server each time:  
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing  
microprocessor  
b. (Trained service technician only) System board  
System-board error  
LED  
System-board CPU VRD and/or  
power voltage regulators have  
failed.  
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
Battery failure LED  
IMM heartbeat LED  
Battery low.  
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
Indicates the status of the boot  
process of the IMM.  
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds  
of when the server is connected to power, complete  
the following steps:  
When the server is connected to  
power this LED flashes quickly  
to indicate that the IMM code  
is loading. When the loading is  
complete, the LED stops flashing  
briefly and then flashes slowly  
to indicate that the IMM if fully  
operational and you can press the  
power-control button to start the  
server.  
1. (Trained service technician only) Rerecover the  
firmware (see “Recovering the server firmware” on  
page 100).  
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system  
board.  
62 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a trained service technician.  
Component LED  
Description  
Action  
PCI slots error LEDs  
An error has occurred on a PCI  
bus or on the system board. An  
additional LED is lit next to a failing  
PCI slot.  
1. Check the system-event log for information about  
the error.  
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the  
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,  
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the server  
after each adapter is removed.  
3. If the failure remains, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support for additional  
troubleshooting information.  
Enclosure manager  
heartbeat LED  
power-on and power-off  
sequencing.  
1. If the LED flashes at 1Hz, it is functioning properly  
and no action is necessary.  
2. If the LED is not flashing, (trained service technician  
only) replace the system board.  
Power-supply LEDs  
The following minimum configuration is required for the DC LED on the power supply to be lit:  
• Power supply  
• Power cord  
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:  
• One microprocessor in microprocessor socket 1  
• One 1 GB DIMM on the system board  
• One power supply  
• Power cord  
• ServeRAID SAS/SATA adapter  
• Five cooling fans  
The following illustration shows the locations of the power-supply LEDs.  
Ethernet 1 Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2  
activity LED link LED  
activity LED  
Power-cord  
connector  
Serial  
connector  
Ethernet 2  
link LED  
NMI button  
USB 3-4 connector  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video  
connector  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 63  
   
System pulse LEDs  
The following LEDs are on the system board and indicates the system power-on and power-off sequencing  
and boot progress (see “System-board LEDs” on page 112 for the location of these LEDs).  
Table 4. System pulse LEDs  
LED  
Description  
Action  
Enclosure manager heartbeat  
power-on and power-off sequencing. 1. If the LED flashes at 1Hz, it is  
functioning properly and no action  
is necessary.  
2. If the LED is not flashing, (trained  
service technician only) replace  
the system board.  
IMM heartbeat  
IMM heartbeat boot process.  
The following steps describe the  
different stages of the IMM heartbeat  
sequencing process.  
1. When this LED is flashing fast  
(approximately 4Hz), the IMM  
code is in the loading process.  
2. When this LED goes off  
momentarily, this indicates  
that the IMM code has loaded  
completely.  
3. When this LED goes off  
momentarily and then starts  
flashing slowing (approximately  
1Hz), theIMM is fully operational.  
You can now press the  
power-control button to power-on  
the server.  
4. If this LED does not flash within 30  
seconds of connecting a power  
flash to the server, complete the  
following steps:  
a. (Trained service technician  
only) Use the IMM recovery  
jumper to recover the firmware  
(see System board jumpers).  
b. (Trained service technician  
only) Replace the system  
board.  
Diagnostic programs and messages  
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components of the server. As you  
run the diagnostic programs, text messages are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A  
diagnostic text message indicates that a problem has been detected and provides the action you should  
take as a result of the text message.  
Make sure that the server has the latest version of the diagnostic programs. To download the latest version,  
complete the following steps.  
64 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Utilities are available to reset and update the diagnostics code on the integrated USB flash device, if the  
diagnostic partition becomes damaged and does not start the diagnostic programs. For more information  
and to download the utilities, go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Running the diagnostic programs  
To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:  
Step 1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.  
Step 2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.  
Step 3. When the prompt <F2> Diagnostics is displayed, press F2.  
Note: The DSA Preboot diagnostic program might appear to be unresponsive for an unusual length  
of time when you start the program. This is normal operation while the program loads.  
Step 4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic program.  
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you must restart the  
server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment again.  
Step 5. Select gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the DSA interactive menu.  
Step 6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.  
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem remains during normal server  
operation, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software problem, see the information  
that comes with your software.  
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the  
first error message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run the diagnostic  
programs.  
Note: If multiple error codes or system-board LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, the error might be in a  
microprocessor or in a microprocessor socket. See “Microprocessor problems” on page 54 for information  
about diagnosing microprocessor problems.  
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try running the diagnostic  
programs again. If the problem remains, replace the component that was being tested when the server  
stopped.  
Diagnostic text messages  
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic text message contains  
one of the following results:  
Passed: The test was completed without any errors.  
Failed: The test detected an error.  
Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration  
Additional information concerning test failures is available in the extended diagnostic results for each test.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 65  
   
Viewing the test log  
To view the test log when the tests are completed, type the view command in the DSA interactive menu,  
or select Diagnostic Event Log in the graphical user interface. To transfer DSA Preboot collections to an  
external USB device, type the copy command in the DSA interactive menu.  
Diagnostic messages  
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might generate and suggested  
actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are  
listed in the column.  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
089-801-xxx  
Aborted Internal  
program  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
CPU  
CPU  
Stress Test  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
error.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Replace the following components one at a  
time, in the order shown, and run this test again  
to determine whether the problem has been  
solved:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo support  
Web site at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for  
technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for  
information.  
66 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
089-802-xxx  
Aborted  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
CPU  
CPU  
Stress Test  
System  
resource  
availability  
error.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component.  
For the latest level of firmware, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support and select  
your system to display a matrix of available  
firmware.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Make sure that the system firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
9. Run the test again.  
089-802-xxx  
Aborted  
1. Replace the following components one at a  
time, in the order shown, and run this test again  
to determine whether the problem has been  
solved:  
CPU  
CPU  
Stress Test  
System  
resource  
availability  
error.  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
2. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo support  
Web site at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for  
technical information, hints, tips, and new  
device drivers or to submit a request for  
information.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 67  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
089-901-xxx  
Failed Test failure.  
1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
CPU  
CPU  
Stress Test  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the system firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
7. Run the test again.  
8. Replace the following components one at a  
time, in the order shown, and run this test again  
to determine whether the problem has been  
solved:  
a. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor board  
b. (Trained service technician only)  
Microprocessor  
9. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
68 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-801-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
the IMM  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
returned an  
incorrect  
response  
length.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-802-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
the test  
cannot be  
completed  
for an  
unknown  
reason.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 69  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-803-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
node is busy;  
try later.  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-804-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
invalid  
command.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
70 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-805-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
invalid  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
command  
for the given  
LUN.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-806-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C  
test stopped:  
timeout while  
processing  
the  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
command.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 71  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-807-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: out  
of space.  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-808-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
reservation  
canceled  
or invalid  
reservation  
ID.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
72 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-809-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
request  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
data was  
truncated.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-810-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C  
test stopped:  
request data  
length is  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
invalid.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 73  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-811-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
request  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
data field  
length limit  
is exceeded.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-812-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C Test  
stopped: a  
parameter is  
out of range.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
74 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-813-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
cannot  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
return the  
number of  
requested  
data bytes.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-814-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
requested  
sensor, data,  
or record is  
not present.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 75  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-815-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C  
test stopped:  
invalid data  
field in the  
request.  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-816-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
command  
is illegal for  
the specified  
sensor or  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
record type.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
76 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-817-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: a  
command  
response  
could not be  
provided.  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-818-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
cannot  
execute a  
duplicated  
request.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 77  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-819-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: a  
command  
response  
could not  
be provided;  
the SDR  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
repository  
is in update  
mode.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-820-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: a  
command  
response  
could not  
be provided;  
the device is  
in firmware  
update  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM  
firmware are at the latest level.  
mode.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
78 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-821-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: a  
command  
response  
could not  
be provided;  
IMM  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
initialization  
is in  
progress.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-822-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped: the  
destination is  
unavailable.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 79  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-823-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
cannot  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
execute the  
command;  
insufficient  
privilege  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
level.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-824-xxx IMM  
Aborted  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
IMM I2C test  
stopped:  
cannot  
execute the  
command.  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
80 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-901-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
H8 bus (Bus  
0)  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Remove power from the system.  
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on  
the system.  
10.Run the test again.  
11.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
166-902-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates a  
1. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
IMM I2C  
Test  
failure in the  
memory bus.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 81  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-903-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
DIMM bus  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
(Bus 2).  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.  
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the  
test again after replacing each DIMM.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10.Run the test again.  
11.Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
12.Reseat all of the DIMMs.  
13.Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
14.Run the test again.  
15.Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
16.(Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
17.Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
18.Run the test again.  
19.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
82 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-904-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
a failure in  
the power  
supply bus  
(Bus 3).  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Reseat the power supply.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
10.Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
11.Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
12.Run the test again.  
13.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 83  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-905-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates a  
failure in the  
HDD bus  
Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive  
backplane is not installed.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
(Bus 4).  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10.Run the test again.  
11.Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
12.(Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
13.Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
14.Run the test again.  
15.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
84 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
166-906-xxx IMM  
Failed The IMM  
indicates  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
the power source. You must disconnect the  
system from ac power to reset the IMM.  
IMM I2C  
Test  
a failure in  
the memory  
configuration  
bus (Bus 5).  
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the  
power source and turn on the system.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest  
level. The installed firmware level is shown in  
the DSA event log in the Firmware/VPD section  
for this component. For more information, see  
“Updating the firmware” on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the  
system board.  
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and  
turn on the system.  
10.Run the test again.  
11.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-801-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
canceled:  
the system  
UEFI  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
programmed  
the memory  
controller  
with an  
invalid CBAR  
address  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 85  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
201-802-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
the end  
address in  
the E820  
function is  
less than 16  
MB.  
3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the  
Setup utility.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-803-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
could not  
enable the  
processor  
cache.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-804-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
the memory  
controller  
buffer  
request  
failed.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
86 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
201-805-xxx Memory  
201-806-xxx Memory  
201-807-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
the memory  
controller  
display/alter  
write  
operation  
was not  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
completed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
the memory  
controller  
fast scrub  
operation  
was not  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
completed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
the memory  
controller  
buffer free  
request  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
failed.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 87  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
201-808-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled:  
memory  
controller  
display/alter  
buffer  
execute  
error.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-809-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
canceled  
program  
error:  
operation  
running fast  
scrub.  
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
88 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
201-810-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Aborted Test  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Run the test again.  
stopped:  
unknown  
error  
code xxx  
received in  
COMMONEXIT  
procedure.  
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
201-901-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Failed Test failure:  
single-bit  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
error, failing  
DIMM z.  
2. Reseat DIMM z.  
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on  
the system.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.  
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see  
“Using the Setup Utility” on page 197).  
9. Run the test again.  
10.Replace the failing DIMM.  
11.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 89  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
201-902-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Test  
Failed Test failure:  
single-bit  
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the  
power source.  
and multi-bit  
error, failing  
DIMM z  
2. Reseat DIMM z.  
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on  
the system.  
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.  
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility see  
“Using the Setup Utility” on page 197).  
9. Run the test again.  
10.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
202-801-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Aborted Internal  
program  
1. Turn off and restart the system.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
error.  
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at  
the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
4. Run the test again.  
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to  
recover from a hung state.  
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the  
specific failing DIMM.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
90 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
202-802-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Failed  
1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by  
General  
error:  
memory size  
is insufficient  
to run the  
test.  
checking the Available System Memory in the  
Resource Utilization section of the DSA event  
log. If necessary, enable all memory in the  
Setup utility (see “Using the Setup Utility” on  
page 197).  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all  
memory.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
202-901-xxx Memory  
Memory  
Stress Test  
Failed Test failure.  
1. Run the standard memory test to validate all  
memory.  
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from  
power.  
4. Reseat the DIMMs.  
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on  
the system.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 91  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
215-801-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Aborted Unable to  
1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
communicate  
Installed  
with the  
device  
driver.  
• Read/  
Write  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Test  
• Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
Messages  
and  
actions  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Make sure that the system firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Replace the DVD drive.  
10.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
92 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
215-802-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Aborted The media  
tray is open.  
1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.  
2. Run the test again.  
Installed  
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait for  
15 seconds for the media to be recognized.  
• Read/  
Write  
4. Run the test again.  
Test  
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
• Self-Test  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
10.Run the test again.  
11.Replace the DVD drive.  
12.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-803-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Failed The disc  
might be in  
use by the  
1. Wait for the system activity to stop.  
2. Run the test again  
Installed  
3. Turn off and restart the system.  
4. Run the test again.  
system.  
• Read/  
Write  
Test  
5. Replace the DVD drive.  
• Self-Test  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 93  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
215-901-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Aborted Drive media  
is not  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
detected.  
2. Run the test again.  
• Read/  
Write  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Test  
• Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-902-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Failed Read  
miscompare.  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
• Read/  
Write  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Test  
• Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
94 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
215-903-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Aborted  
Could not  
access the  
drive.  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
• Read/  
Write  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Test  
• Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest  
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
8. Run the test again.  
9. Replace the DVD drive.  
10.If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
215-904-xxx DVD Drive  
• Verify  
Media  
Failed A read error  
occurred.  
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new  
media, and wait for 15 seconds.  
Installed  
2. Run the test again.  
• Read/  
Write  
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose  
or broken connections or damage to the cable.  
Replace the cable if it is damaged.  
Test  
• Self-Test  
4. Run the test again.  
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go  
to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
Messages  
and  
actions  
apply to all  
three tests.  
6. Run the test again.  
7. Replace the DVD drive.  
8. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 95  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane  
217-901-xxx  
Disk Drive Failed  
Test  
SAS/SATA  
Hard Drive  
connections at both ends.  
2. Reseat all drives.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest  
level.  
5. Run the test again.  
6. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-901-xxx  
Test  
Control  
Registers  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
96 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
405-901-xxx  
Test MII  
Failed  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Registers  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-902-xxx  
Test  
EEPROM  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 97  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
405-903-xxx  
Test  
Failed  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Internal  
Memory  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI  
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If  
the Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if  
possible, use the Setup utility see “Using the  
Setup Utility” on page 197) to assign a unique  
interrupt to the device.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
98 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
405-904-xxx  
Test  
Failed  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
Interrupt  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI  
Hardware section of the DSA event log. If  
the Ethernet device is sharing interrupts, if  
possible, use the Setup utility see “Using the  
Setup Utility” on page 197) to assign a unique  
interrupt to the device.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-906-xxx  
Test Loop  
back at  
Physical  
Layer  
Failed  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and  
make sure that the cable type and connection  
are correct.  
2. Make sure that the component firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
3. Run the test again.  
4. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
5. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 99  
Table 5. DSA Preboot messages (continued)  
• Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is  
solved.  
• See Chapter 7 “Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534” on page 175 to determine which  
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).  
• If an action step is preceded by “(Trained service technician only),” that step must be performed only by  
a Trained service technician.  
• Go to the Lenovo support Web site at http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for technical information,  
hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request for information.  
Message  
number  
Component Test  
State  
Description Action  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
405-907-xxx  
Test Loop  
Failed  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
back at  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
MAC-Layer  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
405-908-xxx  
Test LEDs  
Failed  
1. Make sure that the component firmware is  
at the latest level. The installed firmware  
level is shown in the DSA event log in the  
Firmware/VPD section for this component. For  
more information, see “Updating the firmware”  
on page 211.  
BroadCom  
Ethernet  
Device  
2. Run the test again.  
3. Replace the component that is causing the  
error. If the error is caused by an adapter,  
replace the adapter. Check the PCI Information  
and Network Settings information in the DSA  
event log to determine the physical location of  
the failing component.  
4. If the failure remains, go to the Lenovo Web site  
for more troubleshooting information at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support..  
Recovering the server firmware  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device  
is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
If the server firmware has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during an update, you can  
recover the server firmware in one of two ways:  
100 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
• In-band method: Recover server firmware, using either the boot block jumper (Automated Boot  
Recovery) and a server Firmware Update Package Service Pack.  
• Out-of-band method: Use the IMM Web Interface to update the firmware, using the latest server  
firmware update package.  
Notes: You can obtain a server update package from one of the following sources:  
• Download the server firmware update from the World Wide Web.  
• Contact your Lenovo service representative.  
To download the server firmware update package from the World Wide Web, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
The flash memory of the server consists of a primary bank and a backup bank. It is essential that you  
maintain the backup bank with a bootable firmware image. If the primary bank becomes corrupted, you can  
either manually boot the backup bank with the boot block jumper, or in the case of image corruption, this  
will occur automatically with the Automated Boot Recovery function.  
In-band manual recovery method  
To recover the server firmware and restore the server operation to the primary bank, complete the following  
steps:  
Step 1. Turn off the server, and disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
Step 2. Remove the server cover. See “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119 for more  
information.  
Step 3. Locate the UEFI boot recovery jumper block (JP6) on the system board.  
Boot block  
jumper (JP6)  
Clear CMOS  
jumper (JP1)  
Step 4. Move the jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI recovery mode.  
Step 5. Reinstall the server cover; then, reconnect all power cords.  
Step 6. Restart the server. The power-on self-test (POST) starts.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 101  
Step 7. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update package that  
you downloaded.  
Step 8. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the firmware update package  
readme file.  
Step 9. Copy the downloaded firmware update package into a directory.  
Step 10. From a command line, type filename-s, where filename is the name of the executable file that you  
downloaded with the firmware update package.  
Step 11. Turn off the server and disconnect all power cords and external cables, and then remove the  
server cover.  
Step 12. Move the UEFI boot recovery jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
Step 13. Reinstall the server cover, and then reconnect all the power cables.  
Step 14. Restart the server.  
In-band automated boot recovery method  
Note: Use this method if the system board error LED is lit and there is a log entry or Booting Backup Image is  
displayed on the firmware splash screen; otherwise, use the in-band manual recovery method.  
1. Boot the server to an operating system that is supported by the firmware update package that you  
downloaded.  
2. Perform the firmware update by following the instructions that are in the firmware update package  
readme file.  
3. Restart the server.  
4. At the firmware splash screen, press F3 when you are prompted to restore to the primary bank. The  
server boots from the primary bank.  
Out-of-band method: See the IMM documentation.  
Automated boot recovery (ABR)  
If the server is booting up and the IMM detect problems with the server firmware in the primary bank, it will  
automatically switch to the backup firmware bank and give you the opportunity to recover the primary bank.  
To recover to the server firmware primary bank, complete the following steps.  
1. Restart the server.  
2. When the prompt press F3 to restore to primary is displayed, press F3 to recover the primary bank.  
Pressing F3 will restart the server.  
Three boot failure  
Configuration changes, such as added devices or adapter firmware updates can cause the server to fail  
POST (power-on self-test). If this occurs on three consecutive boot attempts, the server will temporarily use  
the default configuration values and automatically goes to F1 Setup. To solve the problem, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Undo any configuration changes that you made recently and restart the server.  
2. Remove any devices that you added recently and restart the server.  
3. If the problem remains, go to Setup and select Load Default Settings, and then click Save to restore the  
server factory settings.  
102 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
Solving power problems  
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist anywhere on any of the  
power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause the power subsystem to shut down because of  
an overcurrent condition. To diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:  
Step 1. Turn off the server and disconnect all ac power cords.  
Step 2. Check the power-fault LEDs on the system board (see “Power problems” on page 58).  
Step 3. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for example, if a  
loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.  
Step 4. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal and external  
devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is required for the server to start (see  
“Solving undetermined problems” on page 104 for the minimum configuration).  
Step 5. Reconnect all ac power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts successfully, reseat the  
adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, see “Power-supply LEDs” on page 63 to replace  
the components in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.  
Solving Ethernet controller problems  
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you are using.  
See the operating-system documentation for information about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet  
controller device-driver readme file.  
Try the following procedures:  
• Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server are installed and that they are at  
the latest level.  
• Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.  
– The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is attached but the problem  
remains, try a different cable.  
– If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use Category 5 cabling.  
– If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a hub with X ports, use a  
crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the label contains  
an X, the hub has an X port.  
• Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try configuring the integrated  
Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of the hub.  
• Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs indicate whether there  
is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.  
– The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link pulse from the hub. If the  
LED is off, there might be a defective connector or cable or a problem with the hub.  
– The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller sends or receives data  
over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet transmit/receive activity is off, make sure that the hub and  
network are operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
• Check the LAN activity LED on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit when data is active on  
the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make sure that the hub and network are operating  
and that the correct device drivers are installed.  
• Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.  
• Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same protocol.  
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware appears to be working, the  
network administrator must investigate other possible causes of the error.  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 103  
     
Solving undetermined problems  
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use the information in  
this section.  
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or intermittent), see “Software  
problems” on page 60.  
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged server firmware can cause undetermined problems. To reset  
the CMOS data, use the CMOS jumper to clear the CMOS memory and override the power-on password;  
see “System-board switches and jumpers” on page 111. If you suspect that the server firmware is damaged,  
see “Recovering the server firmware” on page 100.  
If the power supplies are working correctly, complete the following steps:  
Step 1. Turn off the server.  
Step 2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.  
Step 3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the failure. Turn on the  
server and reconfigure it each time.  
• Any external devices.  
• Surge-suppressor device (on the server).  
• Printer, mouse, and non-Lenovo devices.  
• Each adapter.  
• Hard disk drives.  
• Memory modules. The minimum configuration requirement is 1 GB DIMM in slots 3.  
Step 4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in the following order:  
• Memory module  
• Microprocessor  
• System board  
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the problem recurs when you  
reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the problem recurs when you replace the adapter with  
a different one, suspect the riser card.  
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests, suspect a network cabling  
problem that is external to the server.  
Problem determination tips  
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that can encounter, use the following  
information to assist you in problem determination. If possible, have this information available when  
requesting assistance from Lenovo.  
The model number and serial number of the server are located on an ID label 1 on the bezel.  
104 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
• Machine type and model  
• Microprocessor or hard disk drive upgrades  
• Failure symptom  
– Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?  
– What occurs? When? Where?  
– Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?  
– Is the failure repeatable?  
– Has this configuration ever worked?  
– What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?  
– Is this the original reported failure?  
• Diagnostic program type and version level  
• Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)  
• IMM firmware level  
• Operating system software  
You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups between working and  
nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each other for diagnostic purposes, consider them  
identical only if all the following factors are exactly the same in all the servers:  
• Machine type and model  
• IMM firmware level  
• Adapters and attachments, in the same locations  
• Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling  
• Software versions and levels  
• Diagnostic program type and version level  
• Configuration option settings  
• Operating-system control-file setup  
Chapter 4. Diagnostics 105  
106 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors  
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on the front and rear of  
the server, and how to turn the server on and off. For the location of the LEDs on the system board, see  
“System-board LEDs” on page 112.  
Note: The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from your model.  
Front view  
The following illustration shows the controls, LEDs, and connectors The following illustration shows the  
controls, LEDs, and connectors on the front of the various models of the server.  
3.5-inch simple-swap SAS server model  
3.5-inch hot-swap SAS/SATA server model  
2.5-inch hot-swap SAS server model  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Power-on LED  
System-error LED  
USB 1 connector  
USB 2 connector  
Power-control button  
Reset button  
Hard disk drive activity LED  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green) (on 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS  
server model) Hard disk drive status LED (amber) (on 2.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS server model)  
5
10  
Locator LED  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber) (on 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS  
server model) Hard disk drive activity LED (green) (on 2.5-inch  
hot-swap SAS server model)  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
107  
   
Rear view  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Power-cord connector  
Serial connector  
Ethernet 1 activity LED  
Ethernet 1 link LED  
Ethernet 2 activity LED  
Ethernet 2 link LED  
PCI slot 1  
NMI button  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
USB 3-4 connector  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video connector  
Power supply error LED (amber)  
DC power LED (green)  
AC power LED (green)  
PCI slot 2  
System-board internal connectors  
The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.  
1
2
11  
12  
21  
22  
DIMM 1  
DIMM 2  
Fan 1 connector  
Riser-card connector 2  
Riser-card connector 1  
Hard disk backplane configuration  
connector  
108 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
3
4
13  
14  
23  
24  
DIMM 3  
DIMM 4  
Battery  
Operator information panel  
connector  
Power 2 connector  
Simple-swap HDD backplane signal  
connector  
5
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
DIMM 5  
Wake-on-LAN connector  
DVD drive connector  
Hypervisor flash device connector  
Reserved  
Virtual media key connector  
Power 1 connector  
Power 3 connector  
Power 4 connector  
Fan 5 connector  
6
DIMM 6  
7
Microprocessor  
Fan 3 connector  
Fan 2 connector  
8
9
Reserved  
10  
Reserved  
Fan 4 connector  
ServeRAD-BR10il  
controller connector  
System-board external connectors  
The following illustration shows the external connectors on the system-board.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ethernet connector 2  
USB connectors 3 and 4  
SW1 (NMI button)  
Serial (com 1) connector  
Video connector  
Ethernet connector 1  
USB connectors 1 and 2  
System-board optional-device connectors  
The following illustration shows the connectors on the system board for user-installable optional devices.  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 109  
   
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIMM 1  
DIMM 2  
DIMM 3  
DIMM 4  
DIMM 5  
DIMM 6  
DVD drive connector  
Hypervisor flash device connector  
Riser-card connector 2  
Riser-card connector 1  
Battery  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
Virtual media key connector  
ServeRAID BR10il SAS/SATA  
controller connector  
The following illustration shows the locations of the PCI Express slots on the riser-card assembly.  
1
2
PCI Express x8 slot 1  
PCI Express x8 slot 2  
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI-X slot on the optional PCI-X riser-card assembly.  
110 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
1
2
PCI-X power cable  
PCI-X slot  
System-board switches and jumpers  
The following illustration shows the switches and jumpers on the system board.  
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 6. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper 1  
• Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
• Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper 2  
• Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
• Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 111  
     
Table 6. System board jumpers (continued)  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
Important:  
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server; then, disconnect all  
power cords and external cables. Review the information in “Guidelines for trained service technicians”  
on page 115, “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117, and “Turning off the server” on page 113.  
2. Any system-board switch or jumper blocks that are not shown in the illustrations in this document  
are reserved.  
System-board LEDs  
The following illustration shows the light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the system board.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
Fan 5 error LED  
Fan 4 error LED  
H8 Heartbeat LED  
Fan 3 error LED  
Fan 2 error LED  
Fan 1 error LED  
PCI Express slot 2 error LED  
PCI Express slot 1 error LED  
Microprocessor error LED  
Battery error LED  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Standby power LED  
System board error LED  
112 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
7
8
15  
DIMM 1-6 error LEDs  
SAS/SATA Controller LED  
IMM heart beat LED  
Table 7. System-board LEDs  
LED  
Description  
Error LEDs  
When one of these LEDs is lit, it indicates that the associated component has  
failed.  
Baseboard management controller  
heartbeat LED  
This LED flashes to indicate that the IMM is functioning normally.  
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the server is connected to ac power.  
Standby power LED  
Server power features  
When the server is connected to an ac power source but is not turned on, the operating system does not  
run, and all core logic except for the service processor (the integrated management module) is shut down;  
however, the server can respond to requests to the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on the  
server. The power-on LED flashes to indicate that the server is connected to ac power but is not turned on.  
Turning on the server  
Approximately 5 seconds after the server is connected to ac power, one or more fans might start running  
to provide cooling while the server is connected to power and the power-on button LED flashes quickly.  
Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button becomes  
active (the power-on LED flashes slowly), and one or more fans might start running to provide cooling while  
the server is connected to power. You can turn on the server by pressing the power-control button.  
The server can also be turned on in any of the following ways:  
• If a power failure occurs while the server is turned on, the server will restart automatically when power  
is restored.  
• If your operating system supports the ®Wake on LAN feature, the ®Wake on LAN feature can turn on  
the server.  
Note: When 4 GB or more of memory (physical or logical) is installed, some memory is reserved for various  
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of memory that is reserved for  
system resources depends on the operating system, the configuration of the server, and the configured  
PCI devices.  
Turning off the server  
When you turn off the server and leave it connected to ac power, the server can respond to requests to  
the service processor, such as a remote request to turn on the server. While the server remains connected  
to ac power, one or more fans might continue to run. To remove all power from the server, you must  
disconnect it from the power source.  
Some operating systems require an orderly shutdown before you turn off the server. See your  
operating-system documentation for information about shutting down the operating system.  
Statement 5  
Chapter 5. Locating Server Controls and connectors 113  
     
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power  
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected  
from the power source.  
2
1
The server can be turned off in any of the following ways:  
• You can turn off the server from the operating system, if your operating system supports this feature. After  
an orderly shutdown of the operating system, the server will turn off automatically.  
• You can press the power-control button to start an orderly shutdown of the operating system and turn off  
the server, if your operating system supports this feature.  
• If the operating system stops functioning, you can press and hold the power-control button for more  
than 4 seconds to turn off the server.  
• The server can be turned off by the Shutdown on LAN feature.  
• The integrated management module (IMM) can turn off the server as an automatic response to a critical  
system failure.  
114 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs  
This chapter provides detailed instructions for replacing FRUs in the server.  
Guidelines for trained service technicians  
This section contains information for trained service technicians.  
Inspecting for unsafe conditions  
Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in a Lenovo product that  
you are working on. Each Lenovo product, as it was designed and manufactured, has required safety items  
to protect users and service technicians from injury. The information in this section addresses only those  
items. Use good judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by non-Lenovo  
alterations or attachment of non-Lenovo features or options that are not addressed in this section. If you  
identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the hazard is and whether you must correct  
the problem before you work on the product.  
Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:  
• Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can cause serious or fatal  
electrical shock.  
• Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.  
• Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.  
To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.  
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and observe any sharp edges.  
3. Check the power cord:  
• Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a meter to measure third-wire  
ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and the frame ground.  
• Make sure that the power cord is the correct type.  
• Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.  
4. Remove the cover.  
5. Check for any obvious non-Lenovo alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety of any non-Lenovo  
alterations.  
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings, contamination, water or  
other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.  
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.  
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not been removed or tampered  
with.  
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment  
Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
115  
         
• Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power extension cords, power  
surges, and missing safety grounds.  
• Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that are covered with a soft  
material that does not provide insulation from live electrical currents.  
• Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational condition. Do not use  
worn or broken tools or testers.  
• Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit. The surface is conductive  
and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if it touches a live electrical circuit.  
• Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharge. Do not use  
this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.  
• Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has hazardous voltages.  
• Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical outlet so that you can  
turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical accident.  
• Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near power supplies, or remove  
or install main units.  
• Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot disconnect the power  
cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that supplies power to the equipment and lock the  
wall box in the off position.  
• Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to make sure that it has been  
disconnected.  
• If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe the following precautions:  
– Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is near you and is available to  
turn off the power if necessary.  
– When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one hand. Keep the other  
hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid creating a complete circuit that could cause an  
electrical shock.  
– When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe leads and accessories  
for that tester.  
– Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal floor strips and equipment  
frames.  
• Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.  
• To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps, blowers, fans, and motor  
generators, do not service these components outside of their normal operating locations.  
• If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another person to get medical  
aid.  
Working inside the server with the power on  
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when the server is powered-on  
might cause the server to halt, which might result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem,  
always use an electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the  
server with the power on.  
You might be instructed to turn on the server while the cover is off, to look at system-board LEDs. Follow  
these guidelines when you work inside a server that is turned on:  
• Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before working inside  
the server; do not wear cuff links while you are working inside the server.  
• Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.  
116 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
• Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist watches.  
• Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that could fall into the server as you  
lean over it.  
• Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws, into the server.  
Handling static-sensitive devices  
Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices. To avoid damage, keep  
static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages until you are ready to install them.  
To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the following precautions:  
• Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.  
• The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an electrostatic-discharge wrist  
strap, if one is available.  
• Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.  
• Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.  
• Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.  
• While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted metal part of the server  
for at least 2 seconds. This drains static electricity from the package and from your body.  
• Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without setting down the device.  
If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into its static-protective package. Do not place the  
device on the server cover or on a metal surface.  
• Take additional care when you handle devices during cold weather. Heating reduces indoor humidity  
and increases static electricity.  
Major components of the server  
The following illustrations show the major components in the server. The illustrations in this document  
might differ slightly from your hardware.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 117  
     
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Riser card assembly  
DIMM air baffle  
Bezel  
DVD drive filler  
Operator information panel  
Fans  
DIMM  
Power supply  
SAS/SATA backplane (some models)  
SATA simple-swap back panel (some models)  
3.5-inch drive cage  
System board  
Microprocessor  
Heat sink  
3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard disk drive (some  
models)  
Cover  
9
Simple-swap SATA filler  
118 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
10  
11  
Hot-swap hard disk drive filler  
3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
(depending on model)  
Removing and installing the cover  
Use the following procedures to remove and install the cover:  
Removing the cover  
To remove the server cover, do the following:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you will lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs will not be lit with the power source removed. Before disconnecting the power source,  
make sure to note which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operator information panel and  
LEDs that are lit inside the server on the system board.  
3. If the server has been installed in a rack, slide the server out from the rack enclosure. See the Rack  
Installation Instructions that come with the server for information about removing the server from the rack.  
4. Press down firmly on the two blue tabs 1 on each side of the top of the cover and slide the cover toward  
the rear of the server until the cover has disengaged from the chassis.  
5. Lift the server cover off the server and set it aside.  
Installing the cover  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.  
To replace the server cover, do the following:  
1. Align the cover over the server (toward the rear of the server) until the cover edges slip in position  
over the chassis.  
2. Press down on the two blue tabs on the front of the cover, while sliding the cover forward toward the  
front of the server until the cover is completely closed.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 119  
     
Removing and installing the bezel  
To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:  
1. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
2. From inside the server, press the bezel release latch 1 toward the left side of the server.  
3. Pivot the bezel 2 forward and pull it away from the server.  
4. If you are instructed to return the bezel, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
120 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the bezel and server cover before you turn on the  
server.  
To install the bezel, insert the tab at the right end of the bezel into the front of the chassis and pivot the  
bezel until it snaps into place.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.  
Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle  
The DIMM air baffle must be removed to allow access to some of the server components. To remove and  
install the DIMM air baffle, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the DIMM air baffle  
To remove the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords and external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Lift the DIMM air baffle 1 up and out of the server.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, reinstall the DIMM air baffle before you turn on the server.  
Operating the server with the air baffle removed might damage server components.  
Installing the DIMM air baffle  
To install the DIMM air baffle, complete the following steps:  
1. Align the DIMM air baffle 1 as shown above.  
2. Lower the DIMM air baffle into position until it clicks into place.  
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, the air baffle must be installed before turning on the server.  
Operating the server with an air baffle removed might damage server components.  
3. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 121  
         
Replacing a memory module (DIMM)  
To replace a dual inline memory module (DIMM), use the following information and procedures:  
Supported memory types  
Following is information that describes the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that the server  
supports and other information that you must consider when you install DIMMs (see “System-board internal  
connectors” on page 108 for the location of the DIMM connectors).  
• The server supports only industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 1066 or 1333 MHz, PC3-6400,  
PC3-8500, or PC3-10600 (single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank), registered or unbuffered, synchronous  
dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) with error correcting  
code (ECC). See http://www.lenovo.com/thinkserver for a list of supported memory modules for the server.  
– The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the following format.  
gggeRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc  
where:  
– ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)  
– e is the number of ranks  
1 = single-rank  
2 = dual-rank  
4 = quad-rank  
– ff is the device organization (bit width)  
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)  
8 = x8 organization  
16 = x16 organization  
– wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps  
6400 = 6.40 GBps (PC3-800 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
12800 = 12.80 GBps PC3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)  
– m is the DIMM type  
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)  
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)  
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)  
– aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency  
– bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level  
– cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM  
– d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM  
• The server supports unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMM) or registered DIMMs (RDIMM).  
• The server supports a maximum of six single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs, depending on the type of DIMM  
you install in the server.  
122 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The information on the label is in the  
format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether  
the DIMM is single-rank (n=1) or dual-rank (n=2).  
• The server supports up to two UDIMMs or three RDIMMs per channel. The following table shows an  
example of the maximum amount of memory that you can install, using ranked DIMMs.  
Unbuffered DIMMs (UDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must configure when you install UDIMMs:  
• The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the DIMMs installed.  
• Do not use both UDIMMs and RDIMMs in the same server.  
• Using ECC and non-ECC UDIMMs in the server will cause the server to run in non-ECC mode.  
• The UDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, and 4 GB (when available) DIMMs.  
• You can install a maximum of 16 GB of memory in some server models when you use UDIMMs.  
• The server supports up to two single-rank or dual-rank UDIMMs per channel.  
• DIMM slots 3 and 6 are not supported when you install UDIMMs in the server. Do not install DIMMs in  
these connectors.  
• The following table lists the supported UDIMM population.  
Table 8. Supported UDIMM population per channel  
DIMM connectors  
per channel  
DIMMs installed in  
each channel  
Ranks per DIMM  
(any combination)  
DIMM type  
DIMM speed  
2
1
Unbuffered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
2
2
Unbuffered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
• The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked UDIMMs.  
Table 9. Maximum memory population using ranked UDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of UDIMMs  
DIMM type  
Size  
Total memory  
4
4
4
4
Single-rank UDIMMs  
Single-rank UDIMMs  
Dual-rank UDIMMs  
Dual-rank UDIMMs  
1 GB  
4 GB  
8 GB  
8 GB  
16 GB  
2 GB  
2 GB  
4 GB (when available)  
• The following table shows the UDIMM memory population rule to optimize the system performance.  
Table 10. UDIMM population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMM  
connector 1  
DIMM  
connector 2  
DIMM  
connector 3  
DIMM  
connector 4  
DIMM  
connector 5  
DIMM  
connector 6  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Registered DIMMs (RDIMMs)  
The following notes provide information that you must consider when you install RDIMMs:  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 123  
• The memory channels run at the fastest common frequency of the installed DIMMs.  
• RDIMMs are supported in models with an Xeon 3400 series processor.  
• Do not use both RDIMMs and UDIMMs in the same server.  
• The server supports up to three single-rank, dual-rank, or quad-rank RDIMMs per channel.  
• The RDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB (when available)  
DIMMs.  
• You can install a maximum of 32 GB of memory in the server when you use RDIMMs.  
• The following table lists the supported RDIMM population.  
Table 11. Supported RDIMM population per channel  
DIMM connectors  
per channel  
DIMMs installed in  
each channel  
Ranks per DIMM  
(any combination)  
DIMM type  
DIMM speed  
3
3
3
3
3
1
2
3
1
2
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066, 1333  
800  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
Single-rank,  
dual-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
1066  
Quad-rank  
Registered DDR3  
ECC  
800  
Quad-rank  
• The following table lists the maximum DIMM population using ranked RDIMMs.  
Table 12. Maximum memory population using ranked RDIMMs (depending on your model)  
Number of RDIMMs  
DIMM type  
Size  
Total memory  
6
6
6
4
4
6
4
Single-rank RDIMMs  
Single-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Quad-rank RDIMMs  
Dual-rank RDIMMs  
Quad-rank RDIMMs  
1 GB  
6 GB  
2 GB  
12 GB  
12 GB  
16 GB  
16 GB  
24 GB  
32 GB  
2 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
4 GB  
8 GB (when available)  
• The following table shows the RDIMM memory population rule to optimize the system performance.  
Table 13. RDIMM population rule for dual-channel symmetric mode  
DIMM  
connector 1  
DIMM  
connector 2  
DIMM  
connector 3  
DIMM  
connector 4  
DIMM  
connector 5  
DIMM  
connector 6  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
Empty  
Populated  
Populated  
124 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced, depending on the system configuration. A certain  
amount of memory must be reserved for system resources. To view the total amount of installed memory  
and the amount of configured memory, run the Setup utility.  
Removing a memory module  
To remove a DIMM, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Carefully open the retaining clips 2 on each end of the DIMM connector and remove the DIMM 1  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors, open and close  
the clips gently.  
6. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a memory module  
• The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM in the server.  
• If you install a pair of DIMMs in DIMM connectors 2 and 5, the size and speed of the DIMMs that you  
install in DIMM connectors 2 and 5 must match each other. How ever, they do not have to be the same  
size and speed as the DIMMs that are installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 4.  
• You can use compatible DIMMs from various manufacturers in the same pair.  
• When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information changes. When you restart the  
server, the system displays a message that indicates that the memory configuration has changed.  
See “System-board internal connectors” on page 108 for the location of the DIMM connectors on the  
system board.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 125  
   
To install a DIMM, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables, if  
necessary.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Open the retaining clip 2 on each end of the DIMM connector.  
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors, open and close  
the clips gently.  
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DIMM to any unpainted metal surface on the  
outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.  
7. Turn the DIMM 1 so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector (see “System-board internal  
connectors” on page 108 for the locations of the DIMM connectors).  
8. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the slots at the ends of  
the DIMM connector .  
9. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the  
DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips 2 snap into the locked position when the DIMM is firmly  
seated in the connector.  
Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been correctly  
inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM, and then reinsert it.  
10.Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing hard disk drives  
Locate the documentation that comes with the hard disk drive and first follow those instructions. Determine  
if you are working with a simple-swap or a hot-swap hard disk drive.  
To replace a hard disk drive, complete the appropriate procedures for your drive:  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in place  
and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
126 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Note: If a RAID controller or PCI card is installed, you might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you  
install or remove hard disk drives. See the documentation that comes with the PCI card for more information.  
Removing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all power from the server  
before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To remove a simple-swap SATA drive from the bay, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
4. Remove the filler panel 2 from the bay.  
5. Pull the loops of the drive tray toward each other and pull the tray 3 out of the bay.  
Installing a simple-swap Serial ATA (SATA) hard disk drive  
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all power from the server  
before you remove or install a simple-swap hard disk drive.  
To install a simple-swap SATA hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Note: If your server has only one simple-swap hard disk drive, make sure it is installed in the left drive bay.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in place  
and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
3. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
4. Remove the filler panel 2 from the bay if necessary.  
5. Pull the loops of the drive tray toward each other, and slide the drive 3 into the server until the drive  
connects to the back plate 1 .  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 127  
   
6. Release the loops of the drive tray.  
7. Insert the filler panel into the bay to cover the drive.  
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a RAID controller, you might have to reconfigure  
your disk arrays after you install hard disk drives. See the RAID controller documentation for additional  
information about RAID operation and complete instructions for using the RAID controller.  
8. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Removing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
The 3.5-inch drive hot-swap server models support either two SAS 3.5-inch hard disk drives or two SATA  
3.5-inch hard disk drives. The 2.5-inch drive hot-swap server models support four 2.5-inch SAS hard  
disk drives.  
The removal and installation procedures are the same for any of these drives. The illustrations in this  
procedure show 3.5-inch SAS drives.  
To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in place  
and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Move the handle 1 on the drive to the open position (perpendicular to the drive).  
2. Slide the release latch (gray on 3.5-inch hard drives and orange on 2.5-inch hard drives) gently to the  
left to unlock the drive handle.  
128 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
3. Grasp the handle and pull the hot-swap drive assembly 2 out of the drive bay.  
Installing a hot-swap hard disk drive  
To install a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.  
Note: If your server has only one hot-swap hard disk drive, install it in the left or upper-left drive bay.  
Attention: To avoid damage to the hard disk drive connectors, make sure that the server cover is in place  
and fully closed whenever you install or remove a hard disk drive.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the server cover is in place and fully closed.  
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10 minutes  
without either a drive or filler panel installed in each bay.  
3. Remove the filler panel from the empty drive bay if necessary.  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted metal surface on the server.  
Then, remove the drive from the static-protective package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
5. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:  
a. Make sure that the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the front of the drive).  
b. Align the drive assembly 3 with the guide rails in the bay.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 129  
 
c. Gently push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive stops.  
d. Push the tray handle 2 to the closed (locked) position.  
e. Check the hard disk drive status LED to make sure that the hard disk drive is operating correctly. If  
the amber hard disk drive status LED for a drive is lit continuously, that drive is faulty and must be  
replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing, the drive is being accessed.  
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a RAID controller, you might have to reconfigure  
your disk arrays after you install hard disk drives. See the RAID controller documentation for additional  
information about RAID operation and complete instructions for using the RAID controller.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing a PCI card  
To replace a PCI card, use the following procedures:  
Removing a PCI card  
To remove a PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Disconnect any cables from the PCI card.  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
6. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, disconnect the riser-card power cable  
from the riser-card assembly.  
130 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
1
2
PCI-X power cable  
PCI-X slot  
7. Grasp the riser-card assembly at the front grip point and rear edges and lift to remove it from the server.  
8. Place the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.  
9. Carefully grasp the PCI card by its top edge or upper corners, and pull the PCI card from the riser-card  
assembly.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Expansion-slot cover  
Expansion slot 2  
PCI card  
Guide channels  
Riser-card assembly  
PCI card  
Expansion slot 1  
Expansion-slot cover  
10.If you are instructed to return the PCI card, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
11.Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 131  
Installing a PCI card  
To install a PCI card, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables; then,  
remove the server cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. If you have installed an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly 2 , disconnect the riser-card power cable 1  
from the riser-card assembly.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Expansion-slot cover  
Expansion slot 2  
PCI card  
Guide channels  
Riser-card assembly  
PCI card  
Expansion slot 1  
Expansion-slot cover  
4. Grasp the riser card at the front grip point and rear edges; then, lift to remove the riser-card assembly.  
Place the riser-card assembly 7 on a flat, static-protective surface.  
5. Remove the expansion-slot cover on the slot that you intend to use.  
132 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Attention: PCI expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This maintains the electronic  
emissions characteristics of the server and ensures proper cooling of server components.  
6. Follow the instructions that come with the PCI card to set any jumpers or switches.  
Attention: When you install an PCI card, make sure that it is completely and correctly seated in the  
expansion slot in the riser card. Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the riser card, system  
board, or the PCI card when you turn on the server.  
7. Insert the PCI card 5 into the riser-card assembly, aligning the edge connector on the PCI card with the  
connector on the riser-card assembly. Press the edge of the connector firmly into the riser-card assembly.  
Make sure that the PCI card snaps into the riser-card assembly securely. Important: Make sure that the  
U-shaped opening in the metal PCI card bracket 4 engages the tab 2 on the expansion-slot bracket 1 .  
Attention: When you install an PCI card, make sure that the PCI card is correctly seated in the riser-card  
assembly and that the riser-card assembly is securely seated in the riser-card connector on the system  
board before you turn on the server. An incorrectly seated PCI card might cause damage to the system  
board, the riser-card assembly, or the PCI card.  
8. Reinstall the riser-card assembly in the server (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
9. If you have installed a PCI-X riser-card assembly 2 in the server, reconnect the riser-card power cable  
2 to the riser-card assembly.  
10.Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To replace a hypervisor flash device, complete the following procedures:  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 133  
   
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To remove a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
5. Unlock the retention latch on the USB connector by squeezing the two retention clips toward each other  
(see “System-board internal connectors” on page 108.  
6. Grasp the flash device and pull to remove it from the connector.  
7. Press down on the retention latch to return it to the locked position.  
8. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device  
To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156) (see  
“System-board internal connectors” on page 108.  
5. Unlock the retention latch on the USB connector by squeezing the two retention clips toward each other  
(see “System-board internal connectors” on page 108.  
6. Align the flash device with the USB connector on the system board and push it into the USB connector  
until it is firmly seated.  
7. Press down on the retention latch to lock the flash device into the USB connector.  
8. Install the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
9. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the operator information panel assembly  
To replace the operator information panel assembly, use the following procedures:  
Removing the operator information panel assembly  
To remove the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Disconnect both cables from the operator information panel assembly.  
5. Remove the screws that secure the operator information panel assembly to the DVD bay housing.  
134 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
       
6. Lift the operator information panel assembly out of the server.  
7. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow all packaging instructions,  
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the operator information panel assembly  
To install the replacement operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Guide the operator information panel assembly into position on top of the DVD bay housing. Make sure  
that the LEDs and the USB connectors are aligned with the openings in the bezel and that the holes in  
the board align with the screw holes in the top of the bay housing.  
2. Use the screws that you removed earlier to secure the operator information panel assembly onto the  
top of the DVD bay housing.  
3. Reconnect both cables to the operator information panel assembly.  
1
Operator information panel assembly  
2
Front panel USB connector  
3
Operator information panel connector  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 135  
 
Replacing the drive cage  
To replace the drive cage, use the following procedures:  
Removing the drive cage  
The following illustration shows removing a simple-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows removing a hot-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows removing a hot-swap 2.5-inch drive cage.  
136 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
To remove a drive cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the hard disk drives from the cage (see “Replacing hard disk drives” on page 126.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
5. Remove the hard disk drive backplane or back plate:  
• 2.5-inch drive models: Remove the hard disk drive backplane from the cage. See “Replacing the  
SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane” on page 153 for instructions.  
• 3.5-inch drive models: Remove the hard disk drive backplane or back plate from the cage. See  
“Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane” on page 153 for instructions.  
6. Remove the screws that hold the drive cage in place.  
7. Slide the drive cage forward and remove it from the server.  
8. If you are instructed to return the drive cage, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the drive cage  
The following illustration shows installing a simple-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 137  
 
The following illustration shows installing a hot-swap 3.5-inch drive cage.  
The following illustration shows installing a hot-swap 2.5-inch drive cage.  
138 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
To install a drive cage, complete the following steps:  
1. Make sure that the backplane or back plate is removed from the drive cage. (See “Removing the  
backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)” on page 153 or “Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch  
drives)” on page 155 for instructions, as applicable.)  
2. Line up the drive cage with the drive bays on the front of the server.  
3. Push the drive cage into the server until it stops.  
4. Align the holes in the top of the drive cage with the holes in the top of the chassis; then, insert the  
screws that secure the drive cage to the chassis.  
5. Install the backplane or back plate. (See “Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)” on  
page 153 or “Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)” on page 155 for instructions, as applicable.)  
6. Install the hard disk drives.  
7. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the microprocessor and heat sink  
The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports and other information that  
you must consider when you install a microprocessor:  
• The server supports one Intel land grid array (LGA) 1156 dual-core or quad-core microprocessor. The  
type, speed, and L3 cache of the microprocessor depends on the server model.  
• Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to determine whether you have to update  
the server firmware. To download the most current level of server firmware, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
• The microprocessor uses an integrated voltage regulator on the system board.  
Removing the microprocessor  
To remove the microprocessor, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack; then, remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 139  
   
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Remove the heat sink.  
CAUTION:  
The heat sink may become very hot during normal operation. Allow time for the heat sink to cool  
down before you touch it.  
a. Loosen the screw on one side of the heat sink to break the seal with the microprocessor.  
b. Press firmly on the captive screws and loosen them with a screwdriver.  
c. Use your fingers to gently pull the heat sink from the microprocessor.  
6. Lift the heat sink out of the server. After removal, place the heat sink on its side on a clean, flat surface.  
7. Release the microprocessor retention latch 2 by pressing down on the end, moving it to the side, and  
releasing it to the open (up) position.  
8. Open the microprocessor bracket frame 3 by lifting up the tab on the top edge. Keep the bracket  
frame in the open position.  
Attention: Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during removal can  
damage the contacts. Also, contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil from your skin,  
can cause connection failures between the contacts and the socket.  
9. Remove the microprocessor:  
a. Carefully lift the microprocessor 1 straight up and out of the socket, without touching the  
microprocessor contacts.  
b. Place the microprocessor on a static-protective surface  
140 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
10.If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the microprocessor  
The following notes describe the type of microprocessor that the server supports and other information that  
you must consider when you install a microprocessor and heat sink:  
• If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.  
• Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor, so that you can determine whether you  
have to update the server firmware. To download the latest level of server firmware and other code  
updates for your server, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
• The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you do not have to set any  
microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.  
• If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner) is removed from the heat  
sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or set down the heat sink. For more  
information about applying or working with thermal grease, see “Thermal grease” on page 142.  
Note: Removing the heat sink from the microprocessor destroys the even distribution of the thermal  
grease and requires replacing the thermal grease.  
To install the replacement microprocessor, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Make sure that the microprocessor bracket frame and release latch are both fully open.  
Attention:  
• When you handle static-sensitive devices, take precautions to avoid damage from static electricity.  
For details about handling these devices, see “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117.  
• The microprocessor contacts are fragile; handle the microprocessor very carefully. Do not touch the  
microprocessor contacts with your skin.  
• The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.  
3. Align the microprocessor 1 with the socket (note the alignment mark 2 and the position of the notches);  
then, carefully place the microprocessor on the socket, close the microprocessor bracket frame 4 ,  
and close the microprocessor release latch 3 .  
4. Gently lower the heat sink on the microprocessor.  
5. Install the heat sink on the microprocessor.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 141  
 
Attention: Do not touch the thermal material on the bottom of the heat sink. Touching the thermal  
material will contaminate it. If the thermal material on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes  
contaminated, contact your service technician.  
a. Make sure that the thermal material is still on the bottom of the heat sink; then, align the heat  
sink so that the arrows on the label point toward the DIMMs and place the heat sink on top of the  
microprocessor, thermal material side down.  
b. Align the screw holes 1 on the heat sink with the holes on the system board 3 Following is an  
illustration of the heat sink orientation.  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
c. Tighten the screws with a screwdriver, alternating among the screws until they are tight. If possible,  
each screw should be rotated two full rotations at a time. Repeat until the screws are tight. Do not  
overtighten the screws by using excessive force.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Thermal grease  
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed from the top of the  
microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is found in the grease.  
When you are installing the heat sink on the same microprocessor that is was removed from, make sure  
that the following requirements are met:  
• The thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor is not contaminated.  
• Additional thermal grease is not added to the existing thermal grease on the heat sink and microprocessor.  
142 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Notes:  
1. Read the safety information at “Important Safety Information” on page 1.  
2. Read “Guidelines for trained service technicians” on page 115.  
3. Read “Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 117.  
To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and heat sink, complete the  
following steps:  
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.  
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.  
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat sink.  
Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.  
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the microprocessor; then, dispose  
of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease is removed.  
5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots 1 of 0.02 mL each on the top of  
the microprocessor 2 . Make sure that the outermost dots are within 5 mm of the edge, to ensure  
even distribution.  
Note: 0.01mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied, approximately half  
(0.22 mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.  
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in “Installing the microprocessor” on page 141.  
Replacing the system board  
To replace the system board, use the following procedures:  
Removing the system board  
Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest firmware or  
restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you  
have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.  
To remove the system board, complete the following steps  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and any attached devices.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 143  
   
3. Turn off the peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove the cover (see “Removing  
and installing the cover” on page 119).  
Note: When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest firmware or  
restore the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that  
you have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed.  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
5. Remove the IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller if one is installed (see “Removing an IBM  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller” on page 158).  
6. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
7. Remove the heat sink and microprocessor, and set them aside on a static-protective surface for  
reinstallation (see “Removing the microprocessor” on page 139).  
8. Remove the memory modules and set them aside on a static-protective surface for reinstallation (see  
“Replacing a memory module (DIMM)” on page 122).  
Note: Make a note of the location of each DIMM as you remove it, so that you can later reinstall it in  
the same connector.  
9. Remove the virtual media key from the system board and set it aside (see “Replacing the virtual media  
key” on page 165). You must reinstall the virtual media key on the new system board.  
10.Remove the hypervisor flash device from the USB connector on the system board and set it aside (see  
“Replacing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page 133). You must reinstall the hypervisor  
flash device on the new system board.  
11.Disconnect all cables from the system board. Make a list of each cable as you disconnect it; you can  
then use this as a checklist when you install the new system board.  
12.Remove the screws 1 that secure the system board to the chassis, and put them in a safe place.  
13.Lift up the system board and carefully remove it from the server, being careful not to damage any  
surrounding components.  
14.If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
144 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Installing the system board  
Note: When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables carefully so that they  
are not exposed to excessive pressure.  
Notes:  
1. When you reassemble the components in the server, be sure to route all cables carefully so that they  
are not exposed to excessive pressure.  
2. When you replace the system board, you must either update the server with the latest firmware or restore  
the pre-existing firmware that the customer provides on a diskette or CD image. Make sure that you  
have the latest firmware or a copy of the pre-existing firmware before you proceed. See “Updating the  
firmware” on page 211 “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on page 168 “Updating the  
DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 170 for more information.  
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device is  
part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before you  
update the code  
To install the system board, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Align the system board with the chassis, and replace the screws that secure the system board.  
3. Reinstall the microprocessor and heat sink (see “Installing the microprocessor” on page 141).  
4. Reinstall the DIMMs (see “Installing a memory module” on page 125).  
5. Reinstall the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
6. If necessary, reinstall ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller (see “Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA controller” on page 159).  
7. Reinstall the PCI riser-card assemblies and PCI cards, if any were installed (see “Installing the riser-card  
assembly” on page 157 and “Installing a PCI card” on page 132).  
8. Reinstall the virtual media key (see “Replacing the virtual media key” on page 165).  
9. Reinstall the hypervisor flash device (see “Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device” on page  
134).  
10.Reconnect all cables to the system board that were disconnected.  
11.Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
12.Slide the server into the rack.  
13.Reconnect the power cords and any cables that you removed.  
14.Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.  
Important: Perform the following updates:  
• Either update the server with the latest RAID firmware or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette  
or CD image.  
• Update the UUID (see “Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)” on page 168.  
• Update the DMI/SMBIOS (see “Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data” on page 170).  
Replacing the power supply  
This procedure is used when replacing a defective power supply.  
When you remove or install the power supply, observe the following precautions.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 145  
   
Statement 5  
CAUTION:  
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power supply do not turn off  
the electrical current supplied to the device. The device also might have more than one power  
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected  
from the power source.  
2
1
Statement 8  
CAUTION:  
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached.  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label  
attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with  
one of these parts, contact a service technician.  
Removing the power supply  
To remove the power supply, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Disconnect the ac power cord from the connector on the power supply. Disconnect all external cables  
from the server.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
Attention: To ensure proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server for more than 30 minutes  
with the cover removed.  
4. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
5. Disconnect the power-supply cables from the connectors on the system board and from all devices;  
then, disengage the cables from any retention-clips that secure them to the side of the power-supply.  
Note: Note the routing of all power-supply cables; you will route the power-supply cables the same  
way when you install the power supply.  
146 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
6. Remove the screw 2 that holds the power supply 1 to the rear of the chassis.  
7. Loosen the captive thumbscrew 3 that secures the power supply to the chassis bottom.  
8. Lift the power supply out of the bay.  
9. If you are instructed to return the power supply, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the power supply  
To install the replacement power supply, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Place the new power supply into the chassis.  
3. Tighten the captive thumbscrew that secures the power supply to the chassis bottom.  
4. Replace the screw that holds the power supply to the rear of the chassis.  
5. Connect the internal power-supply cables from the power supply to the power connectors on the system  
board. See “System-board internal connectors” on page 108 for the locations of the power connectors  
on the system board.  
• For power supply without advanced energy management, connect the power cables to power  
connectors 1 and 2 on the system board.  
• For high-efficient power supply with advanced energy manage, connect the power cables to power  
connectors 1, 2, 3, and 4 on the system board.  
6. Route the internal power-supply cables, securing them with the retention-clips.  
7. Test the power supply:  
a. Connect one end of the ac power cord for the new power supply into the connector on the back of the  
power supply, and connect the other end of the power cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
b. Make sure that the standby power LED on the system board is lit (see “System-board LEDs” on page  
112); if the standby power LED is not lit, discontinue this procedure and obtain a new power supply.  
c. Press the power-control button. Make sure that the power-on LED on the front of the server is lit.  
If the server starts, proceed to step . If the server does not start, disconnect the ac power cord and  
call for service.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 147  
 
8. Turn off the server and disconnect the ac power cord.  
9. Connect the cables from the power supply to the internal devices.  
10.Install the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
11.Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
12.Slide the server into the rack.  
13.Reconnect the ac power cord into the connector on the back of the power supply.  
14.Reconnect all external cables that were disconnected.  
15.Connect the other end of the ac power cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.  
16.Press the power-control button (see “Turning on the server” on page 113.  
17.Make sure that the power-on LED on the front of the server is lit.  
Replacing a fan assembly  
The server comes with five replaceable cooling fans. Use the following procedures to replace a fan.  
Removing a fan assembly  
To remove any of the five replaceable fans, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and all peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on  
page 119).  
4. Reconnect the power cord; then, turn on the server.  
Attention: Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with the cover  
removed might damage server components.  
5. Determine which fan to replace by checking the LEDs on the system board (see “System-board LEDs” on  
page 112); a lit LED indicates the fan to replace.  
6. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the power cord again.  
7. Remove the DIMM air baffle (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on page 121).  
8. Remove the failed fan from the server:  
a. Disconnect the fan cable from the system board (see “System-board internal connectors” on page  
108). You may need to disengage the cables from cable retention clips. Note the routing of the fan  
cable to the connector; you will have to route the fan cable the same way when you install the fan.  
b. Grasp the top of the fan with your index finger and thumb and lift the fan out of the server.  
148 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Table 14. Removing the fan  
1
2
3
4
5
Fan 1  
Fan 2  
Fan 3  
Fan 4  
Fan 5  
9. If you are instructed to return the fan, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials  
for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a fan assembly  
To install the replacement fan, complete the following steps:  
1. Position the replacement fan so that the airflow arrow on the fan points toward the rear of the server.  
Note: Correct airflow is from the front to the rear of the server.  
2. Install the replacement fan in the bracket:  
a. Make sure that the fan cable 1 sits in the channel on the side of the fan.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 149  
 
b. In the location from which you removed the failed fan, route the fan cable into its slot 2 in the fan  
bracket top.  
c. Insert the fan 4 into the bracket 3 .  
d. Make sure that each of the grey soft tabs on the fan is fully seated in its slot in the fan bracket.  
3. Connect the replacement fan cable to the system board.  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the system-board battery  
To replace the system-board battery, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the battery  
To remove the battery, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. If necessary, lift the riser-card assembly out of the way (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on  
page 156).  
5. Remove the battery:  
150 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
a. Use a fingernail to press the top of the battery clip away from the battery. The battery pops up  
when released.  
b. Use your thumb and index finger to lift the battery from the socket.  
6. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations. See “Battery return program” on  
page 225 for more information.  
Installing the battery  
The following notes describe information that you must consider when replacing the system-board battery in  
the server.  
• When replacing the system-board battery, you must replace it with a lithium battery of the same type  
from the same manufacturer.  
• After you replace the system-board battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the system date  
and time.  
• To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.  
Statement 2  
CAUTION:  
When replacing the lithium battery, use only an equivalent type battery recommended by the  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 151  
 
manufacturer. If your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same  
module type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not  
properly used, handled, or disposed of. Do not:  
• Throw or immerse into water  
• Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)  
• Repair or disassemble  
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.  
To install the replacement battery, complete the following steps:  
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the replacement battery.  
2. Insert the new battery:  
a. Orient the battery so that the positive side faces up.  
b. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the socket on the side opposite the battery clip.  
c. Press the battery down into the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip holds  
the battery securely.  
3. Make sure that the riser-card assembly is fully seated in the connectors on the system board.  
4. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, make sure that the riser-card power  
cable 1 is connected to the riser-card assembly.  
5. Install the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Slide the server into the rack.  
7. Reconnect the external cables; then, reconnect the power cords and turn on the peripheral devices and  
the server.  
Note: You must wait approximately 1 to 3 minutes after you connect the power cord of the server to an  
electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes active.  
8. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration (see “Starting the Setup Utility” on page 198 for details).  
• Set the system date and time.  
• Set the power-on password.  
• Reconfigure the server.  
152 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Replacing the SAS/SATA hard disk drive back plate or backplane  
To replace the SAS/SATA hard disk drive backplane or back plate, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
To remove the Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) backplane, which is also referred to as the hot-swap SAS/SATA  
backplane, or to remove the simple-swap SATA back plate, complete the following steps.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Pull the hard disk drives out of the server slightly to disengage them from the backplane or back plate.  
5. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Lift the backplane or back plate 1 out of the server.  
7. Disconnect the backplane or back plate cables:  
• If the server is a hot-swap model, disconnect the SAS/SATA controller signal cable from the backplane.  
Note: You might want to disconnect the cable from the SAS/SATA controller first, or remove the  
SAS/SATA controller from its connector, to make it easier to disconnect the cable from the backplane  
or back plate.  
• If the server is a simple-swap mode that contains a standard SATA back plate, disconnect the SATA  
cable from the system board.  
• If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a SATA RAID back plate, disconnect the SAS signal  
cable from the SAS/SATA controller.  
8. If you are instructed to return the backplane or back plate, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the backplane or back plate (3.5-inch drives)  
To install the replacement 3.5-inch hot-swap drives backplane or simple-swap SATA drives back plate,  
complete the following steps.  
Note: The following illustration shows installing the hot-swap SAS/SATA backplane.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 153  
     
1
2
Connectors  
Guide channels  
1. Connect the power cable to the replacement backplane or back plate.  
2. Reconnect the backplane or back plate cables:  
• If the server is a hot-swap model, reconnect the SAS/SATA controller signal cable to the backplane.  
• If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a standard SATA back plate, reconnect the SATA  
cable to the system board. See “System-board internal connectors” on page 108 for the location  
of the SATA connectors on the system board.  
Note: Make sure that the cable drive number on the back plate matches the SATA connector number  
on the system board.  
•
If the server is a simple-swap model that contains a SATA RAID back plate, reconnect the SAS  
signal cable to the SAS/SATA controller.  
3. Slide the backplane or back plate into the card guides, making sure that any nearby wires or cables  
are not trapped or pinched.  
4. Press firmly until the backplane or back plate is fully seated.  
5. Install the hard disk drives.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
154 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Removing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
1
2
3
4
Alignment  
tabs  
Alignment slots  
Connectors  
Connectors  
To remove the 2.5-inch drives backplane, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Pull the hard disk drives out of the server slightly to disengage them from the backplane.  
5. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
6. Lift the backplane or back plate out of the server.  
7. Disconnect the backplane cables:  
• Disconnect the SAS/SATA controller cable from the backplane.  
• Disconnect the power cable from the backplane.  
• Disconnect the system board cable from the backplane.  
8. If you are instructed to return the backplane or back plate, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the SAS backplane (2.5-inch drives)  
To install the replacement 2.5-inch hot-swap drives backplane, complete the following steps.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 155  
   
1
2
3
4
Alignment tabs  
Alignment slots  
Drive connectors  
Drive connectors  
1. Connect the cables to the replacement backplane.  
2. Slide the backplane into the card guides, making sure that any nearby wires or cables are not trapped  
or pinched.  
3. Press firmly until the backplane is fully seated and clicks into place.  
4. Install the hard disk drives.  
5. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly  
To replace the PCI riser-card assembly, use the following procedures:  
Removing the riser-card assembly  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Grasp the riser-card assembly 1 at the front and rear edges and lift to remove it from the server. Place  
the riser-card assembly on a flat, static-protective surface.  
156 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
6. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, disconnect the riser-card power  
cable 1 from the riser-card assembly.  
7. Disconnect any cables from the PCI cards in the riser-card assembly.  
8. If you are instructed to return the riser-card assembly, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the riser-card assembly  
To remove the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
The server comes with one riser-card assembly that contains two PCI Express connectors.  
To install the riser-card assembly, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Install the PCI cards in the riser-card assembly.  
3. Reconnect any PCI card cables that you disconnected when you removed the riser-card assembly.  
4. If the riser-card assembly is an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly, reconnect the riser-card power cable  
1 to the riser-card assembly.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 157  
 
5. Carefully align the riser-card assembly with the guides on the rear of the server and with the riser-card  
connectors on the system board; then, press down on the assembly. Make sure that the riser-card  
assembly 1 is fully seated in the connector on the system board.  
6. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller  
To replace an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller, use the following procedures:  
Removing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller  
To remove an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller from the system board, complete the following  
steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power  
source, make a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information  
panel and LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
158 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
6. Disconnect the signal cables that are attached to the SAS/SATA controller.  
7. Grasp the SAS/SATA controller 1 while you press outward on the plastic tabs.  
8. Pull out the SAS/SATA controller from the connector 2 on the system board.  
9. If you are instructed to return the SAS/SATA controller, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller  
Read the following notes before installing the ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller.  
Notes:  
1. Some server models come with an IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller installed. The controller  
can be installed only in the dedicated slot on the system board (see “System-board optional-device  
connectors” on page 109 for the location of the connector). Use the following procedures to install the  
controller if your server model did not come with this controller installed or to replace a failing controller.  
2. The IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller enables integrated RAID levels 0, 1, and 1E capability  
on hot-swap hard disk drives. For configuration information, see the RAID documentation at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
3. Important: To ensure that any of your ServeRAID controllers function properly on UEFI-based servers,  
make sure that the controller firmware and supporting device drivers are updated to at least 11.x.x-XXX.  
Attention: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code updates. If the device  
is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before  
you update the code.  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
Note: When you disconnect the power source from the server, you lose the ability to view the LEDs  
because the LEDs are not lit when the power source is removed. Before you disconnect the power  
source, make a note of which LEDs are lit, including the LEDs that are lit on the operation information  
panel and LEDs inside the server on the system board.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Removing the riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 159  
 
6. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller to  
any unpainted surface on the outside of the server; then, grasp the controller by the top edge or upper  
corners of the controller and remove it from the package.  
7. Align the ServeRAID controller 1 so that the keys align correctly with the connector 2 on the system  
board.  
8. Insert the ServeRAID controller into the connector on the system board until it is firmly seated. The  
retention bracket secures the ServeRAID controller in place when the controller is firmly seated into  
the connector on the system board.  
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the server or the controller.  
9. Route the signal cables from the drive backplane through the fan cage hole (between fans 1 and 2)  
as shown in the following illustration.  
160 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
10.Connect the signal cable that is attached to the drive backplane 1 to the ServeRAID controller connector  
2 .  
11.Replace the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
Note: When you restart the server, you are prompted to import the existing RAID configuration to the new  
ServeRAID controller.  
12.Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the DVD drive cable  
To replace the optical drive cable, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the DVD drive cable  
To remove the DVD drive cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
5. Remove the DVD drive (see “Replacing a DVD drive” on page 163).  
6. From the front of the server, press the cable connector latch 1 and slide the DVD drive cable to the  
unlock position; then, slide the cable connector to the right and pull the cable out from the connector.  
7. Remove the cable from the DVD drive cage connector.  
8. Disconnect the DVD drive power cable from the power supply cable.  
9. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive cable, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the DVD drive cable  
To install the DVD drive cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 161  
     
3. Align the cable connector with the connector on the rear of the DVD drive cage and press the cable  
connector into the DVD drive cage connector until it is firmly seated.  
4. Pull the cable connector latch 2 up and hold it there while you slide the cable connector to the lock  
position; then, slide the cable connector latch down to lock the cable in place.  
The following illustration shows cable routing for the DVD drive cable.  
Note: Route the DVD drive cable 2 through the fan cage hole on the left of fan 1.  
162 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
5. Connect the DVD drive cable to the system board connector 1 .  
6. Reconnect the DVD drive power cable to the power supply cable.  
7. Reinstall the DVD drive (see “Replacing a DVD drive” on page 163).  
8. Reinstall the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
9. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing a DVD drive  
To replace a DVD drive, complete the following procedures:  
Removing a DVD drive  
To remove a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Pull the release tab 1 (the rear of the drive-retention clip) toward the right side of the server to release  
the clip; then, while you pull the tab, push the drive out of the bay.  
Note: You might have to push the right-rear corner of the drive toward the front of the server to move  
the drive initially.  
5. Remove the retention clip 1 from the drive and save for future use.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 163  
     
6. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging  
materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing a DVD drive  
The following notes describe the type of drives that the server supports and other information that you must  
consider when you install a DVD drive.  
• Locate the documentation that comes with the drive and follow those instructions in addition to the  
instructions in this chapter.  
• Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in the documentation that  
comes with the drive.  
• The server supports one ultra-slim SATA DVD drive.  
To install a DVD drive, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords and all external cables.  
3. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the new DVD drive to any unpainted metal surface on  
the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place it on a static-protective surface.  
5. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set any jumpers or switches.  
6. Attach the drive-retention clip 1 that you removed from the failing drive to the side of the new DVD drive.  
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the following safety precaution.  
Statement 3  
164 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
CAUTION:  
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or transmitters) are  
installed, note the following:  
• Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could result in exposure to  
hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the device.  
• Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein  
might result in hazardous radiation exposure.  
DANGER  
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following.  
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical  
instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.  
Class 1 Laser Product  
Laser Klasse 1  
Laser Klass 1  
Luokan 1 Laserlaite  
`
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1  
7. Slide the drive into the DVD drive bay until the drive clicks into place.  
8. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the virtual media key  
To replace the virtual media key, complete the following procedures:  
Removing the virtual media key  
To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all power cords; then, remove the cover (see  
“Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Grasp the virtual media key 4 and gently slide it up and off of the mounting tab 2 .  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 165  
     
Microprocessor  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
4. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging instructions, and use any  
packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the virtual media key  
To install the virtual media key, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Align the virtual media key 4 with the mounting tab 2 and 1 ; then slide it down the tab onto the  
connector 3 on the system board. Press the virtual media key down into the connector until it is firmly  
seated on the system board.  
166 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Microprocessor  
Heatsink  
Orientation  
DIMMs  
DIMMs  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Replacing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
To replace the PCI-X riser-card power cable, use the following procedures:  
Removing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
If an optional PCI-X riser-card assembly is installed in the server, an internal power cable for the assembly  
is also installed.  
To remove the PCI-X riser-card power cable, complete the following steps:  
1. Read the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1 and “Guidelines for trained  
service technicians” on page 115.  
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cord and all external cables.  
3. Remove the server from the rack and place it on a flat, static-protective surface.  
4. Remove the cover (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
5. Remove the riser-card assembly (see “Replacing the PCI riser-card assembly” on page 156).  
6. Remove the PCI card from the riser-card assembly if one is installed (see “Removing a PCI card” on  
page 130).  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 167  
   
7. Disconnect the riser-card power cable from the PCI-X riser card.  
8. If you are instructed to return the PCI-X riser-card power cable, follow all packaging instructions, and  
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.  
Installing the PCI-X riser-card power cable  
To install the replacement PCI-X riser-card power cable, complete the following steps.  
1. Connect the riser-card power cable to the PCI-X riser-card assembly.  
2. Install the adapter in the riser-card assembly (see “Installing a PCI card” on page 132).  
3. Install the riser-card assembly (see “Installing the riser-card assembly” on page 157).  
4. Go to “Completing the FRU replacement” on page 172.  
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)  
The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is replaced. Use the  
Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that  
supports several operating systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system. To  
download the ASU and update the UUID, complete the following steps:  
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers to link to the ASU program.  
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of the following methods to  
access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to set the UUID:  
• Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)  
• Remote access to the target system (LAN based)  
168 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to the server. Make sure  
that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the same directory. In addition to the application  
executable (asu or asu64), the following files are required:  
• For Windows based operating systems:  
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf  
– device.cat  
• For Linux based operating systems:  
– cdc_interface.sh  
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID: asu set  
SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]  
Where:  
<uuid_value>  
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.  
[access_method]  
The access method that you selected to use from  
the following methods:  
• Online authenticated LAN access, type the command: [host <imm_internal_ip>] [user  
<imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_internal_ip  
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The  
default value is 169.254.95.118.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default  
value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts).  
The default value is PASSW0RD (with a zero 0  
not an O).  
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default values. When the default  
values are used and ASU is unable to access the IMM using the online authenticated LAN access  
method, ASU will automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Example that does not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> user <user_id>  
password <password>  
Example that does use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>  
• Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted): You do not need to specify a value for  
access_method when you use this access method.  
Example:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>  
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires that the IPMI driver  
be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI driver installed by default. ASU provides the  
corresponding mapping layer. See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You  
can access the ASU Users Guide from the Lenovo support Web site.  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage  
from the Select your product list.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 169  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers.  
e. Click User's guides and manuals to link to the ASU Users Guide.  
• Remote LAN access, type the command:  
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the LAN from a client, the  
host and the imm_external_ip address are required parameters.  
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_external_ip  
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no  
default value. This parameter is required.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default  
value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts).  
The default value is PASSW0RD (with a zero 0  
not an O).  
The following commands are examples of using the user ID and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Example that does not use the user ID and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>  
user <user_id> password <password>  
Example that does use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> host <imm_ip>  
5. Restart the server.  
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data  
The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board is replaced. Use the  
Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based server. The ASU is an online tool that  
supports several operating systems. Make sure that you download the version for your operating system. To  
download the ASU and update the DMI, complete the following steps.  
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers to link to the ASU program.  
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of the following methods to  
access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to set the DMI:  
• Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)  
• Remote access to the target system (LAN based)  
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to the server. Make sure  
that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the same directory. In addition to the application  
executable (asu or asu64), the following files are required:  
• For Windows based operating systems:  
– ibm_rndis_server_os.inf  
170 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
– device.cat  
• For Linux based operating systems:  
– cdc_interface.sh  
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]asu  
set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]asu set  
SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]  
Where:  
The server machine type and model number. Type  
<m/t_model>  
mtm xxxxyy, where xxxx is the machine type and  
yyy is the server model number.  
The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz,  
where zzzzzzz is the serial number.  
<s/n>  
<asset_method>  
The server asset tag number. Type asset  
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where  
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset  
tag number.  
[access_method]  
The access method that you select to use from  
the following methods:  
• Online authenticated LAN access, type the command: [host <imm_internal_ip>] [user  
<imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_internal_ip  
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The  
default value is 169.254.95.118.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default  
value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts).  
The default value is PASSW0RD (with a zero 0  
not an O).  
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default values. When the default  
values are used and ASU is unable to access the IMM using the online authenticated LAN access  
method, ASU will automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> user <imm_user_id>  
password <imm_password>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum  
<s/n>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
• Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted): You do not need to specify a value for  
access_method when you use this access method.  
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires that the IPMI driver  
be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI driver installed by default. ASU provides the  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 171  
corresponding mapping layer. To see the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide. You can access the  
ASU Users Guide from the Lenovo support Web site.  
a. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage  
from the Select your product list.  
c. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210;, and click Continue.  
d. Click Downloads and drivers.  
e. Click User's guides and manuals to link to the ASU Users Guide.  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum  
<s/n>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>  
• Remote LAN access, type the command:  
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the LAN from a client, the  
host and the imm_external_ip address are required parameters.  
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>[[password <imm_password>]  
Where:  
imm_external_ip  
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no  
default value. This parameter is required.  
imm_user_id  
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default  
value is USERID.  
imm_password  
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts).  
The default value is PASSW0RD (with a zero 0  
not an O).  
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password default values and not  
using the default values:  
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>  
user <imm_user_id> password <imm_password>  
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:  
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> host <imm_ip>asu  
set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> host <imm_ip>asu set  
SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> host <imm_ip>  
5. Restart the server.  
Completing the FRU replacement  
To complete the installation, do the following:  
1. If the DIMM air baffle was removed, reinstall it now (see “Removing and installing the DIMM air baffle” on  
page 121).  
2. Reinstall the cover if it was removed (see “Removing and installing the cover” on page 119).  
3. Reinstall the server in the rack cabinet.  
4. Reconnect all cables and power cords (see “Connecting the cables” on page 173.  
172 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
5. Update the server configuration (see “Updating the server configuration” on page 174).  
6. Slide the server back into the rack, if necessary.  
7. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.  
Connecting the cables  
The following illustration shows the locations of the input and output connectors on the front of the server.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Power-on LED  
System-error LED  
7
Power-control button  
Reset button  
USB 1 connector  
8
USB 2 connector  
9
Hard disk drive activity LED  
Locator LED  
Hard disk drive activity LED (green)  
Hard disk drive status LED (amber)  
10  
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Power-cord connector  
Serial connector  
Ethernet 1 activity LED  
Ethernet 1 link LED  
Ethernet 2 activity LED  
Ethernet 2 link LED  
PCI slot 1  
NMI button  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
USB 3-4 connector  
USB 1-2 connector  
Video connector  
Power supply error LED (amber)  
DC power LED (green)  
AC power LED (green)  
PCI slot 2  
You must turn off the server before you connect or disconnect cables.  
See the documentation that comes with any external devices for additional cabling instructions. It might be  
easier for you to route cables before you connect the devices to the server.  
Cable identifiers are printed on the cables that come with the server and optional devices. Use these  
identifiers to connect the cables to the correct connectors.  
Chapter 6. Replacing FRUs 173  
 
Updating the server configuration  
When you start the server for the first time after you add or remove an internal option or external device,  
you might receive a message that the configuration has changed. The UEFI Setup Utility program starts  
automatically so that you can save the new configuration settings.  
Some options have device drivers that you must install. For information about installing device drivers, see  
the documentation that comes with each option.  
If the server has an optional RAID and you have installed or removed a hard disk drive, see the documentation  
that comes with the RAID for information about reconfiguring the disk arrays.  
For information about configuring the integrated Gigabit Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the Gigabit  
Ethernet controllers” on page 218.  
174 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and  
6534  
The following replaceable components are available for the ThinkServer RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and  
6534 servers. To check for an updated parts listing on the Web, complete the following steps:  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
175  
 
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
Riser card assembly  
DIMM air baffle  
Bezel  
DVD drive filler  
Operator information panel  
Fans  
DIMM  
Power supply  
SAS/SATA backplane (some models)  
SATA simple-swap back panel (some models)  
3.5-inch drive cage  
System board  
Microprocessor  
Heat sink  
3.5-inch simple-swap SATA hard disk drive (some  
models)  
Cover  
9
Simple-swap SATA filler  
10  
11  
Hot-swap hard disk drive filler  
3.5-inch or 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive  
(depending on model)  
Replaceable server components  
Replaceable components are of three types:  
• Self-service customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of self-service CRUs is your responsibility.  
If Lenovo installs a self-service CRU at your request, you will be charged for the installation.  
• Optional-service customer replaceable unit: You may install an optional-service CRU yourself or  
request Lenovo to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated  
for your server.  
• Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.  
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance, see the Warranty and  
Support Information document.  
The following table lists the part numbers for the server components.  
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
3
46U2906  
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO 11U 11F  
11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D  
12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
3
46U2907  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM (models  
CTO)  
176 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
46U1992  
46U2941  
46U2942  
44T1490  
44T1491  
44T1572  
44T1573  
44T1575  
46C7488  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1 x 4 GB, Dual Rank x8) 1 PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8 GB (1x 8 GB, Quad Rank x8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066 MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L  
11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G  
12M 12A 12J)  
4
5
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5" (models CTO All Models)  
3.5" DASD CAGE (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
6
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
45J9644  
45J9658  
45J9646  
45J9648  
46U2120  
46U2124  
46U2128  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5" Hot-Swap SAS (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5'' HS HDD (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 177  
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
46U2117  
46U2758  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
SYSTEM FAN (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
17  
17  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
18  
19  
59Y3221  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
TOP-COVER (models CTO All Models)  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, miniSAS Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O Cable (models CTO All Models)  
178 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 15. Parts listing, Types 6531 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
Cable, 3.5" SS SATA Cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC Shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O Board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA Controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA Controller v2 (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L  
12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA Controller with Remote Battery  
Kit (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
6531 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 179  
6531 Software FRU  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
180 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
2
3
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
3
46U2906  
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO 11U 11F  
11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D  
12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
46U2907  
46U1992  
44T1490  
44T1491  
44T1572  
44T1573  
44T1575  
46C7488  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM (models  
CTO)  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1 x 4 GB, Dual Rank x8) 1 PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8 GB (1x 8 GB, Quad Rank x8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066 MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L  
11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G  
12M 12A 12J)  
4
5
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5" (models CTO All Models)  
3.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
6
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
11  
11  
45J9644  
45J9658  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5" Hot-Swap SAS (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 181  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
45J9646  
45J9648  
46U2120  
46U2124  
46U2128  
46U2117  
46U2758  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5'' HS HDD (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
17  
17  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
182 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
18  
19  
59Y3221  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5" SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L  
12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote Battery  
Kit (models CTO)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 183  
Table 16. Parts listing, Types 6532 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number (Tier  
2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
46M0864  
46M0922  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
6532 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
184 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
6532 Software FRU  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
3
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
46U1991  
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
46U2906  
46U2907  
46U1992  
44T1490  
44T1491  
44T1572  
44T1573  
44T1575  
46C7488  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM (models  
CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1 x 4 GB, Dual Rank x8) 1 PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8 GB (1x 8 GB, Quad Rank x8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066 MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
4
4
5
6
7
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO)  
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5" (models CTO All Models)  
3.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
59Y3226  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 185  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
8
8
8
8
45J9634  
46U1024  
45J9638  
46U2916  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Simple-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Simple-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Simple-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J )  
Hard disk drive, IBM Server 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5" Simple Swap  
HDD (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
9
39M4343  
39M4375  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
SATA Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
10  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
49Y4648  
49Y4649  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
18  
19  
59Y3221  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
186 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 17. Parts listing, Types 6533 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
Cable, 3.5" SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
43W4297  
44E8696  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
46M0851  
46M0854  
46M0862  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote Battery  
Kit (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
6533 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 187  
6533 Software FRU  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
1
1
1
2
49Y4675  
46C6796  
49Y4673  
46C6798  
Riser PCIX (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E LP (models CTO All Models)  
Riser PCI-E FH (models CTO All Models)  
Air Duct (models CTO All Models)  
188 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
3
3
3
46U1991  
46U2906  
46U2907  
Memory module, 1GB DDR3-1333 1Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO)  
Memory module, 1GB (1x1GB, Single Rankx8) PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP UDIMM (models  
CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 15G 15M  
15A 15J)  
3
46U1992  
Memory module, 2GB DDR3-1333 2Rx8 LP RDIMM (models  
CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J 13U 13F  
13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
44T1490  
44T1491  
44T1572  
44T1573  
44T1575  
46C7488  
46U2941  
46U2942  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3 1333 LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 1 GB (1 x 1 GB) 1Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 2 GB (1 x 2 GB) 2Rx8 1Gbit PC3-10600  
DDR3-1333 LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1 x 4 GB, Dual Rank x8) 1 PC3-10600  
CL9 ECC DDR3 1333MHz LP UDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8 GB (1x 8 GB, Quad Rank x8) PC3-8500  
CL7 ECC DDR3 1066 MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 4GB (1x4GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
Memory module, 8GB (1x8GB, Quad Rankx8) PC3-8500 CL7  
ECC DDR3 1066MHz LP RDIMM (models CTO)  
49Y4663  
49Y4664  
Power supply, 351W-LE PSU (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L  
11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G  
12M 12A 12J 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J)  
4
Power supply, 351W-HE PSU (models CTO 14U 14F 14S 14L  
14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
5
6
SAS HS BACKPLANE 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Backplane 2.5" (models CTO All Models)  
3.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
SATA Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
SAS Filler 3.5" (models CTO All Models)  
46C6756  
46C6757  
7
59Y3226  
39M4343  
39M4375  
45J9642  
9
10  
11  
Hard disk drive, 250GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
11  
45J9644  
Hard disk drive, 500GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 189  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
11  
45J9658  
45J9646  
45J9648  
46U2120  
46U2124  
46U2128  
46U2117  
46U2758  
Hard disk drive, 146GB 15K 3.5" Hot-Swap SAS (models CTO  
11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S  
12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
Hard disk drive, 750GB 7200 RPM 3.5" Hot-Swap SATA II  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
Hard disk drive, IBM 1TB 7200 SATA 3.5'' HS hard disk drive  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J  
12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J )  
IBM 146GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
IBM 300GB 10K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
IBM 73GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
IBM 146GB 15K 6Gbps SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD (models  
CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F  
14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
IBM 500GB 7200 6Gbps NL SAS 2.5" SFF Slim-HS HDD  
(models CTO 13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J  
14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A  
15J)  
11  
11  
11  
46U3014  
46U3015  
46U3016  
ThinkServer 300GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 450GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
ThinkServer 600GB 6Gbps 15K 3.5’ Hot-Swap SAS drive  
(models CTO All Models)  
12  
13  
15  
16  
17  
46U2944  
49Y4868  
59Y3212  
Front Bezel (models CTO All Models)  
DVD Blank (models CTO All Models)  
System fan (models CTO All Models)  
System board, Planar (models CTO All Models)  
69Y1013  
49Y4645  
Microprocessor, Celeron G1101 2.26GHz/1066MHz-2MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
17  
17  
17  
49Y4646  
49Y4647  
49Y4648  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3460 2.8GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3430 2.4GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3440 2.53GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
190 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
17  
49Y4649  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3450 2.67GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F 14S  
14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J)  
17  
17  
17  
17  
49Y4668  
46C6775  
59Y3175  
59Y3176  
Microprocessor, Pentium G6950 2.8 GHz/1066MHz-3MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Xeon X3470 2.93GHz/1333MHz-8MB 4C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-540 3.06 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
Microprocessor, Core i3-530 2.93 GHz/1333MHz-4MB 2C  
(models CTO)  
18  
19  
59Y3221  
Heat Sink (models CTO All Models)  
59Y3223  
33F8354  
24P1121  
39M4351  
41Y3884  
59Y3210  
59Y3214  
59Y3228  
59Y3230  
44T2248  
46C6797  
59Y3218  
59Y3225  
59Y3227  
39Y6070  
Top cover (models CTO All Models)  
System battery (models CTO All Models)  
1U Tool-Less Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
EAR Bracket (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, mini SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, backplane cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 500mm SAS cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, Front I/O cable (models CTO All Models)  
Cable, 3.5" SS SATA cable (models CTO All Models)  
Blank EMC shield (models CTO All Models)  
Fornt I/O board (models CTO All Models)  
HD InstCaution Label (models CTO All Models)  
Low case (models CTO All Models)  
2.5" DASD cage (models CTO All Models)  
NetXtreme II 1000 Express Ethernet Adapter (models CTO  
All Models)  
39Y6128  
39Y6138  
42C1069  
42C1752  
42C1802  
44W3254  
44W3255  
44W3256  
PRO/1K PT Dual (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PT Quad (models CTO All Models)  
2Post Rail Kit (models CTO All Models)  
PRO/1K PF Srvr (models CTO All Models)  
QLogic 10Gb adapter (models CTO All Models)  
SATA DVD-ROM (models CTO)  
SATA CD-RW DVD (models CTO)  
SATA Mulitburn (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G  
11M 11A 11J 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J 14U 14F 14S  
14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 191  
Table 18. Parts listing, Types 6534 (continued)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 1)  
CRU part  
number  
(Tier 2)  
FRU part  
number  
Index Description  
43W4297  
44E8696  
44E8701  
49Y4737  
ServeRAID-MR10i SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10is VAULT SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
IBM 3Gb SAS HBA controller v2 (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA controller v2 (models CTO 11U  
11F 11S 11L 11D 11Y 11G 11M 11A 11J)  
46M0851  
ServeRAID M5015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 14U  
14F 14S 14L 14D 14Y 14G 14M 14A 14J 15G 15M 15A 15J)  
46M0854  
46M0862  
ServeRAID M5025 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M1015 SAS/SATA controller (models CTO 12U  
12F 12S 12L 12D 12Y 12G 12M 12A 12J 13U 13F 13S 13L  
13D 13Y 13G 13M 13A 13J)  
43W4301  
43W4341  
ServeRAID-MR10i Li-Ion Battery (models CTO)  
ServeRAID-MR10M SAS/SATA controller with Remote Battery  
Kit (models CTO)  
46M0864  
46M0922  
ServeRAID M1015 RAID 5 Upgrade Key (models CTO)  
ServeRAID M5014 SAS/SATA Controller (models CTO)  
6534 Software FRU  
EasyManage (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
69Y9937  
90Y1164  
90Y1165  
90Y1166  
90Y1167  
90Y1168  
90Y1169  
90Y1170  
90Y1171  
90Y1172  
90Y1173  
90Y1174  
90Y1175  
90Y1176  
90Y1177  
90Y1178  
90Y1179  
90Y1180  
90Y1181  
90Y1182  
Documentation DVD (models CTO All Models)  
EasyStartup (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS2008 R2 FOUND 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 SBS SP2 PREM 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
192 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
6534 Software FRU  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
FRU#  
90Y1183  
90Y1184  
90Y1185  
90Y1186  
90Y1187  
90Y1188  
90Y1189  
90Y1190  
90Y1191  
90Y1192  
90Y1193  
90Y1194  
90Y1195  
90Y1196  
90Y1197  
90Y1198  
90Y1199  
90Y1200  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 STD 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit US (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit NL (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit FR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit GR (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit IT (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit JP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit SP (models CTO All Models)  
WS 2008 R2 ENT 64bit TR (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/JP (models CTO All Models)  
ROK WS2008 FOUND 64bit MUI EN/FR/GR/SP/IT (models CTO All Models)  
Power cords  
For your safety, Lenovo provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use with this Lenovo  
product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and plug with a properly grounded outlet.  
Lenovo power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) and  
certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).  
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set consisting of a  
minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel  
blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified cord set  
consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length  
and a tandem blade, grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.  
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set with a grounding-type  
attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate safety approvals for the country in which the  
equipment will be installed.  
Lenovo power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that country or region.  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 193  
 
Table 19. Power cords, Type 6531  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5206  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12A )  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
China 2.8M (models CTO)  
Table 20. Power cords, Type 6532  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5247  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12A)  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
194 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Table 21. Power cords, Type 6533  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
39M5226  
39M5179  
39M5233  
39M5247  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A)  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11A)  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
Table 22. Power cords, Type 6534  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
Used in these countries and regions  
Taiwan 2.8M (models CTO)  
39M5247  
39M5102  
39M5123  
39M5130  
39M5144  
ANZ 2.8M (models CTO 11M 12M 13M 14M 15M)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Denmark 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
S. Africa 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11M 11A 12G 12M 12A 13G 13M 13A 14G 14M  
14A 15G 15M 15A)  
39M5151  
39M5158  
39M5165  
UK 2.8M (models CTO 11G 11A 12G 12A 13G 13A 14G 14A 15G 15A)  
Switzerland 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
Italy 2.8M (models CTO 11S 11L 11Y 11G 12S 12L 12Y 12G 13S 13L 13Y 13G 14S  
14L 14Y 14G 15G)  
39M5172  
39M5219  
39M5199  
39M5068  
39M5081  
Israel 2.8M (models CTO 11G 12G 13G 14G 15G)  
Korea 2.8M (models CTO)  
Japan 2.8M (models CTO 11J 12J 13J 14J 15J)  
Argentina 2.8M (models CTO 11L 11Y 12L 12Y 13L 13Y 14L 14Y)  
US/Canada 2.8M (models CTO 11U 11F 11S 11L 11D 11A 12U 12F 12S 12L 12D 12A  
13U 13F 13S 13L 13D 13A 14U 14F 14S 14L 14D 14A 15A)  
39M5226  
39M5179  
India 2.8M (models CTO)  
Europe 2.8M (models CTO)  
Chapter 7. Parts listing, RS210 Types 6531, 6532, 6533, and 6534 195  
Table 22. Power cords, Type 6534 (continued)  
Lenovo Power cord part  
number  
39M5233  
39M5206  
Used in these countries and regions  
Brazil 2.8M (models CTO)  
China 2.8M (models CTO)  
196 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server  
The following configuration programs come with the server:  
• Setup Utility program  
The Setup Utility program is part of the UEFI. Use it to configure serial port assignments, change interrupt  
request (IRQ) settings, change the startup-device sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords.  
• Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is part of the server firmware. Use it to override the startup sequence that is  
set in the Setup Utility and temporarily assign a device to be first in the startup sequence.  
• ThinkServer EasyStartup program  
This program simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and installing your operating  
system. It is on the ThinkServer EasyStartup DVD provided with your server. For details, see “Using  
the EasyStartup DVD” on page 207.  
• Integrated Management Module  
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the firmware and sensor data  
record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to remotely manage a network.  
• ThinkServer EasyManage products  
ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server and ThinkServer EasyManage Agent work together to provide  
centralized hardware and software inventory management and secure automated system management  
through a single console. See “Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software” on page 215.  
• Remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture feature are integrated into the Integrated Management  
Module (IMM). The virtual media key is required to enable the remote presence functions. When the  
optional virtual media key is installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. Without the  
virtual media key, you will not be able to access the network remotely to mount or unmount drives or  
images on the client system. However, you will still be able to access the Web interface without the virtual  
media key. You can order the optional Lenovo Virtual Media Key, if one did not come with your server. For  
more information about how to enable the remote presence function, see “Using the remote presence  
capability and blue-screen capture” on page 217.  
• LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure the integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID  
capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For information about using this program, see “Using  
LSI Configuration Utility program” on page 204.  
• Ethernet controller configuration  
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see “Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet  
controllers” on page 218.  
• IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program  
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI settings and IMM settings. Use  
the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need  
to restart the server to access the Setup utility. For more information about using this program, see .  
Using the Setup Utility  
The Setup Utility program is part of the UEFI. You can use it to perform the following tasks:  
• View configuration information  
• View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports  
• Set the date and time  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
197  
     
• Set and change passwords  
• View and change the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices (startup-drive  
sequence)  
• View and change settings for advanced hardware features  
• View and clear the event and error logs  
• Change interrupt request (IRQ) settings  
• Resolve configuration conflicts  
Starting the Setup Utility  
To start the Setup Utility, do the following:  
Step 1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to power, the power-control  
button becomes active.  
Step 2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an administrator password,  
you must type the administrator password to access the full Setup Utility menu. If you do not type  
the administrator password, a limited Setup Utility menu is available.  
Step 3. Select settings to view or change.  
Setup Utility menu choices  
The following choices are on the Setup Utility main menu for the UEFI. Depending on the version of the  
firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these descriptions.  
• System Information  
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes through other choices  
in the Setup Utility, some of those changes are reflected in the system information; you cannot change  
settings directly in the system information. This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
– System Summary  
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed, and cache size of the  
microprocessors, machine type and model of the server, the serial number, the system UUID, and the  
amount of installed memory. When you make configuration changes through other options in the Setup  
Utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change settings directly in  
the system summary.  
– Product Data  
Select this choice to view the system-board identifier, the revision level or issue date of the firmware,  
the integrated management module and diagnostics code, and the version and date.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
• System Settings  
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.  
– Processors  
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.  
– Memory  
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings.  
– Devices and I/O Ports  
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output (I/O) ports. You can  
configure the serial ports; configure remote console redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet  
controllers, the SAS/SATA controller, SATA DVD drive channels, and PCI slots; and view the system  
198 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Ethernet MAC addresses. If you disable a device, it cannot be configured, and the operating system  
will not be able to detect it (this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).  
– Power  
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption, processors, and  
performance states.  
– Legacy Support  
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.  
– Force Legacy Video on Boot  
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does not support UEFI video  
output standards.  
– Rehook INT  
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the boot process. The default  
is Disable.  
– Legacy Thunk Support  
Select this choice to enable or disable UEFI to interact with PCI mass storage devices that are  
non-UEFI compliant.  
– Integrated Management Module  
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated management module.  
– POST Watchdog Timer  
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.  
– POST Watchdog Timer Value  
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.  
– Reboot System on NMI  
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) occurs. Disabled  
is the default.  
– Commands on USB Interface Preference  
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on IMM.  
– Network Configuration  
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port, the IMM MAC address,  
the current IMM IP address, and the host name; define the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and  
gateway address; specify whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP  
address; save the network changes; and reset the IMM.  
– Reset IMM to Defaults  
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.  
– Reset IMM  
Select this choice to reset IMM.  
– System Security  
Select this choice to view or configure Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support.  
– Adapters and UEFI Drivers  
Select this choice to view information about the UEFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0 compliant controllers and  
drivers installed in the server.  
– Network  
Select this choice to view or configure the network device options, such as iSCSI, PXE, and network  
devices.  
Note: The configuration forms for UEFI 2.1 and greater compliant add-on network devices might  
be located here.  
• Date and Time  
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format (hour:minute:second).  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 199  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
• Start Options  
Select this choice to view or change the start options, including the startup sequence, keyboard NumLock  
state, PXE boot option, and PCI device boot priority. Changes in the startup options take effect when you  
start the server.  
The startup sequence specifies the order in which the server checks devices to find a boot record. The  
server starts from the first boot record that it finds. For example, you can define a startup sequence that  
checks for a disc in the DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and then checks a network adapter.  
This choice is on the full Setup Utility menu only.  
• Boot Manager  
Select this choice to view, add, delete, or change the device boot priority, boot from a file, select a  
one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.  
If the server has ®Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system supports ®Wake on  
LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the ®Wake on LAN functions. For example, you  
can define a startup sequence that checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard  
disk drive, and then checks a network adapter.  
• System Event Logs  
Select this choice to enter the System Event Manager, where you can view the error messages in the  
system event logs. You can use the arrow keys to move between pages in the error log.  
The system event logs contain all event and error messages that have been generated during POST, by  
the systems-management interface handler, and by the system service processor. Run the diagnostic  
programs to get more information about error codes that occur.  
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are no other error indications,  
clear the IMM system-event log. Also, after you complete a repair or correct an error, clear the IMM  
system-event log to turn off the system-error LED on the front of the server.  
– POST Event Viewer  
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the POST error messages.  
– System Event Log  
Select this choice to view the IMM system event log.  
– Clear System Event Log  
Select this choice to clear the IMM system event log.  
• User Security  
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See “Passwords” on page 201 for more information.  
This choice is on the full and limited Setup Utility menu.  
– Power-on PasswordSelect this choice to set or change a power-on password. See “Power-on  
password” on page 201 for more information.  
– Administrator PasswordSelect this choice to set or change an administrator password. An  
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it limits access to the full  
Setup Utility menu. If an administrator password is set, the full Setup Utility menu is available only if  
you type the administrator password at the password prompt. For more information, see “Administrator  
password” on page 201.  
• Save Settings  
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.  
• Restore Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and restore the previous  
settings.  
200 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
• Load Default Settings  
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and restore the factory  
settings.  
• Exit Setup  
Select this choice to exit from the Setup Utility. If you have not saved the changes that you have made in  
the settings, you are asked whether you want to save the changes or exit without saving them.  
Passwords  
From the System Security choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on password and an  
administrator password. The System Security choice is on the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu only.  
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to complete the system startup;  
you have access to the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu.  
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it limits access to the full  
Configuration/Setup Utility menu. If you set only an administrator password, you do not have to type a  
password to complete the system startup, but you must type the administrator password to access the  
Configuration/Setup Utility menu.  
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a system administrator, you can  
type either password to complete the system startup. A system administrator who types the administrator  
password has access to the full Configuration/Setup Utility menu; the system administrator can give the user  
authority to set, change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on password  
has access to only the limited Configuration/Setup Utility menu; the user can set, change, and delete the  
power-on password, if the system administrator has given the user that authority.  
Power-on password  
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will not be completed until  
you type the power-on password. You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z,  
and 0 - 9) for the password.  
If a power-on password is set, you can enable the Unattended Start mode, in which the keyboard and  
mouse remain locked but the operating system can start. You can unlock the keyboard and mouse by  
typing the power-on password.  
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of the following ways:  
• If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the password prompt (see  
“Administrator password” on page 201). Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and reset the  
power-on password.  
• Remove the battery from the server and then reinstall it. For instructions for removing the battery, see  
“Replacing the system-board battery” on page 150.  
• Change the position of the clear CMOS jumper on the system board to bypass the power-on password  
check. See “Power-on password” on page 201 for additional information.  
Attention: Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server; then, disconnect  
all power cords and external cables. See the safety information in “Important Safety Information” on page 1  
and “Guidelines for trained service technicians” on page 115. Do not change settings or move jumpers on  
any system-board switch or jumper block that is not shown in this document.  
Administrator password  
If an administrator password is set, you must type the administrator password for access to the full Setup  
utility menu. You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 201  
     
If you forget the administrator password, you can reset it after you change the position of the clear CMOS  
jumper.  
Resetting passwords  
If you forget the power-on password or administrator password, you can move the clear-CMOS jumper block  
on the system board to pins 2 and 3, to clear CMOS memory and bypass the power-on or administrator  
password check. The jumper location is shown in the following illustration.  
Table 23. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper 1  
• Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
• Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper 2  
• Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
• Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
Using the Boot Manager program  
The Boot Manager program is a built-in, menu-driven configuration utility program that you can use to  
temporarily redefine the first startup device without changing settings in the Setup Utility.  
202 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
To use the Boot Manager program, do the following:  
Step 1. Turn off the server.  
Step 2. Restart the server.  
Step 3. When the prompt <F12> Select Boot Device is displayed, press F12. If a bootable USB mass  
storage device is installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk) is displayed.  
Step 4. Use the Up arrow and Down arrow keys to select an item from the Boot Selection Menu and press  
Enter. The server attempts to boot from the selected device.  
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the Setup Utility.  
Configuring RAID controllers  
The following table lists the various utilities available to configure RAID controllers before an operating  
system is installed.  
Table 24. RAID configuration utilities  
Where to find more  
information  
RAID configuration utility Description  
Location  
• For use with all  
EasyStartup RAID  
configuration utility  
EasyStartup DVD  
“Using the EasyStartup  
DVD” on page 207  
factory-supported  
RAID controllers except  
ServeRAID-BR10i  
• Automatically detects  
hardware and lists  
all supported RAID  
configurations  
• Configures one or more  
disk arrays per controller  
depending on the number  
of drives attached to the  
controller and the RAID  
level selected  
• Supports hot-spare drives  
• Creates a RAID response  
file that can be used to  
configure RAID controllers  
on similarly configured  
Lenovo servers.  
For:  
In system firmware. To  
access:  
MegaRAID BIOS  
Configuration Utility  
(WebBIOS)  
“Using the WebBIOS  
utility” on page 205  
• IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller  
• Use UEFI Setup Utility.  
• IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA Controller  
• Press Ctrl + H at the  
WebBIOS prompt  
during startup.  
• IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 203  
 
Table 24. RAID configuration utilities (continued)  
Where to find more  
information  
RAID configuration utility Description  
Location  
For:  
In system firmware. To  
access:  
LSI Configuration Utility  
“Using LSI Configuration  
Utility program” on page  
204  
• IBM ServeRAID-BR10il  
SAS/SATA Controller  
• Use UEFI Setup Utility.  
• IBM ServeRAID-MR10i  
SAS/SATA Controller  
• Press Ctrl + C at the LSI  
prompt during startup.  
• IBM ServeRAID-M1015  
SAS/SATA controller  
Using LSI Configuration Utility program  
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array of independent disks  
(RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in this document.  
• Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:  
– Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive  
– Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive  
– Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives  
The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays. You can use the LSI  
Configuration Utility program to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID 1E (IME), and RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of  
attached devices. If you install a different type of RAID controller, follow the instructions in the documentation  
that comes with the adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.  
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage arrays, consider the  
following information:  
• The integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities supports the following features:  
– Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1) Use this option to create an  
integrated array of two disks plus up to two optional hot spares. All data on the primary disk can be  
migrated.  
– Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1E) Use this option to  
create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight disks, including up to two optional hot  
spares. All data on the array disks will be deleted.  
– Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0) Use this option to create an integrated striping array  
of two to eight disks. All data on the array disks will be deleted.  
• Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array can have different  
capacities, but the RAID controller treats them as if they all have the capacity of the smallest hard disk  
drive.  
• If you use an integrated SAS/SATA controller with RAID capabilities to configure a RAID 1 (mirrored) array  
after you have installed the operating system, you will lose access to any data or applications that were  
previously stored on the secondary drive of the mirrored pair.  
• If you install a different type of RAID controller, see the documentation that comes with the controller for  
information about viewing and changing settings for attached devices.  
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program  
To start the LSI Configuration Utility program, complete the following steps:  
1. Turn on the server.  
204 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button  
becomes active.  
2. When the prompt <F1 Setup> is displayed, press F1. If you have set an administrator password, you  
are prompted to type the password.  
3. Select System Settings → Adapters and UEFI drivers.  
4. Select Please refresh this page on the first visit and press Enter.  
5. Select LSIcontroller_driver_name Driver and press Enter, where controller_driver_name is the name of  
the SAS/SATA controller driver. For the SAS/SATA controller driver name, see the documentation that  
comes with your controller.  
6. To perform storage-management tasks, follow the procedures in the documentation that comes with the  
SAS/SATA controller.  
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program; select Save to save the  
settings that you have changed.  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk that you want to save,  
back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.  
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a mirrored pair.  
To format a drive, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drive that you want to format and press  
Enter.  
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.  
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.  
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys. To scroll left and  
right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or the End key. Press Alt+D.  
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.  
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives  
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:  
1. From the list of adapters, select the controller (channel) for the drives that you want to mirror.  
2. Select RAID Properties.  
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.  
4. Use the arrow keys to highlight the first drive in the pair; then, press the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key to  
change the mirror value to Primary.  
5. Continue to select the next drive using the Minus (-) or Plus (+) key until you have selected all the  
drives for your array.  
6. Press C to create the disk array.  
7. Select Apply changes and exit menu to create the array.  
Using the WebBIOS utility  
The WebBIOS configuration utility enables you to create and manage RAID configurations on LSI SAS  
controllers. The WebBIOS utility resides in the SAS controller BIOS and operates independently of  
the operating system. The WebBIOS utility provides a configuration wizard to guide you through the  
configuration of virtual disks and physical arrays.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 205  
   
Starting the WebBIOS utility  
Perform the following steps to start the WebBIOS utility and access the main menu:  
1. After you turn on the power and when the computer is starting, you are prompted to press Ctrl + H when  
the following message is displayed:  
Copyright© LSI Logic Corporation  
Press <Ctrl><H> for WebBIOS  
2. Select a controller from the list.  
3. Click Start. The main WebBIOS utility interface is displayed. You can toggle between the physical  
view and logical view of the storage devices that are connected to the controller. Click Physical View  
or Logical View on the menu in the left pane to change the view.  
Main menu of the WebBIOS utility  
The main menu includes the following options:  
Adapter Properties  
Scan Devices  
From this view, you can display and modify the  
properties of the SAS controller that is currently  
selected.  
From this view, you can re-scan the physical and  
virtual disks for any changes in the drive status or  
physical configuration.  
Virtual Disks  
From this view, you can display and modify the  
virtual disk properties, delete virtual disks, initialize  
disks, and perform other tasks.  
Physical Drives  
Configuration Wizard  
Adapter Selection  
From this view, you can view the physical drive  
properties, create hot spare disks, and perform  
other tasks.  
Select this to start the Configuration Wizard  
and create a new storage configuration, clear a  
configuration, or add a new configuration.  
From this view, you can select a different SAS  
adapter. Then, you can view information about the  
adapter and the drives connected to it, or create a  
new configuration for the adapter.  
Physical View or Logical View  
Select this to toggle between the Physical View and  
Logical View.  
Events  
Exit  
From this view, you can display the system events  
in the Event Information page.  
Select this to exit the WebBIOS utility and continue  
with the system boot.  
Creating a storage configuration using the Configuration Wizard  
Follow these steps to start create a storage configuration:  
1. Click Configuration Wizard to start the wizard.  
2. Select a configuration option:  
206 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
Attention: If you select Clear Configuration or New Configuration, all existing data in the configuration  
is deleted. Make a backup copy of any data that you want to keep before selecting these options.  
Clear Configuration  
New Configuration  
Clears the existing configuration.  
Clears the existing configuration and lets you  
create a new configuration.  
Add Configuration  
Retains the existing storage configuration and  
adds new drives to it (this does not cause any  
data loss).  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select a configuration mode from the following options:  
Custom Configuration  
In this mode, you can control all attributes of the  
new storage configuration.  
This mode automatically creates an optimal  
RAID 1 or RAID 5 configuration, providing data  
redundancy.  
Auto Configuration and Redundancy  
Auto Configuration without Redundancy  
This mode automatically creates a non-redundant  
RAID 0 configuration.  
5. Click Next to continue.  
Viewing and changing properties  
You can view information for one LSI SAS at a time. If your system has multiple LSI SAS adapters, you can  
view information for a different adapter, click Adapter Selection on the main view. To view the properties for  
the currently selected adapter, click Adapter Properties on the main WebBIOS screen.  
Viewing and changing virtual disk properties  
On the WebBIOS main screen, select a virtual disk from the list and click Virtual Disk.  
The Properties panel displays the RAID level, state, size, and stripe size.  
The Policies panel lists the virtual disk policies that were defined when the storage configuration was  
created. To change any of these policies, select a policy from the menu and click Change. The Operations  
panel lists operations that can be performed on the virtual disk. Select the operation and click Go. Then  
choose from the following operations:  
• Select Del to delete this virtual disk.  
• Select Locate and the LEDs flash on the physical drives used by this virtual disk.  
• Select Fast or Slow to initialize this virtual disk.  
Attention: Before you run an initialization, back up any data on the virtual disk that you want to save. All  
data on the virtual disk is lost when you initialize it.  
Using the EasyStartup DVD  
The EasyStartup DVD simplifies the process of configuring your RAID controllers and installing an operating  
system. The program works in conjunction with your Windows or Linux operating-system installation disc to  
automate the process of installing the operating system and associated device drivers.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 207  
       
If you did not receive an EasyStartup DVD with your server, you can download an image from the Lenovo  
Support Web site at: http://www.lenovo.com/support  
The EasyStartup program has the following features:  
• Self-booting DVD  
• Easy-to-use, language-selectable interface  
• Integrated help system  
• Automatic hardware detection  
• RAID configuration utility  
• Device drivers (based on the server model and detected devices)  
• Selectable partition size and file system type  
• Support for Windows, Red Hat, and SUSE Server operating systems  
• Installs the operating system and device drivers in an unattended mode to save time  
• Creates a reusable response file that can be used with similarly configured Lenovo servers to make  
future installations even faster  
Before you use the EasyStartup DVD  
Functionality and supported operating systems can vary with different versions of the EasyStartup program.  
To learn more about the version you have, do the following:  
1. Insert the EasyStartup DVD and restart the server.  
2. Advance to the Home screen.  
3. Click Compatibility notes. The compatibility notes feature provides detailed information about the RAID  
controllers, operating systems, and server configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup  
program.  
4. Click User Guide. The user guide provides an overview of the various functions provided by that version  
of the EasyStartup program.  
Before using the EasyStartup program to install an operating system, make sure any external storage  
devices and fiber channels are configured correctly.  
EasyStartup overview  
The EasyStartup program requires a supported Lenovo server with an enabled, startable (bootable) DVD  
drive. In addition to the EasyStartup DVD, you also must have the operating-system installation CD or DVD  
and the product key or installation number for the operating system (if provided).  
The EasyStartup program performs the following tasks:  
• Detects installed hardware devices  
• Guides you through the process of configuring one or more RAID controllers  
• Guides you through the process of creating a response file for the unattended installation of the operating  
system  
• Enables you to create scripts or commands that run at the end of the operating system installation process  
• Facilitates the installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage products and DVD-burning software (Windows  
installation only)  
• Prepares the hard disk for installation  
• Prompts you to insert the operating-system installation disc  
208 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
• Initiates an unattended installation of the operating system and device drivers  
Setup and configuration  
When you start the EasyStartup DVD, you will be prompted for the following:  
• Select the language in which you want to view the program.  
• Select the language of the keyboard you will be using with the program.  
Note: The following language keyboards are supported: English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Japanese,  
Spanish, and Turkish.  
You will then see one or more reminders about configuring storage devices, and then you will be presented  
with the Lenovo License Agreement. Read the license agreement carefully. You must agree with terms in  
order to continue.  
After agreeing to the license agreement, you will be given the following choices:  
• Continue to the main program interface  
• Use a shortcut to install an operating system based on a response file that you previously created using  
the EasyStartup program  
• Use a short cut to configure RAID controllers based on a RAID response file that you previously created  
using the EasyStartup program  
If you continue to the main program interface, you will have the following selectable options:  
• Compatibility notes: This selection provides information about the RAID controllers, operating systems,  
and server configurations supported by that version of the EasyStartup program.  
• User Guide: This selection provides information about the features provided by that version of the  
EasyStartup program.  
• Hardware list: This selection displays a list of hardware devices detected by the EasyStartup program.  
• Configure RAID: This selection enables you to view the current RAID configuration for each installed  
RAID controller and make changes if needed.  
• Install operating system: This selection displays a series of choices and prompts to collect information  
required for installation, prepares the hard disk for installation, and then initiates the installation process  
using the user-provided operating-system installation CD or DVD.  
• About: This selection displays version information and legal notices.  
Configuring RAID  
The RAID configuration feature that is part of the EasyStartup program enables you to view and change RAID  
settings for supported RAID controllers. Through this feature, you have the ability to configure each installed  
controller. The program automatically detects the number of discs currently attached to the controller,  
determines the possible RAID configurations that can be configured, and prompts you through the steps to  
configure one or more disc arrays with or without hot-spare drives. As you configure each controller you will  
be given the option to save the RAID configuration settings to a RAID response file, which you can use on  
other similarly configured Lenovo servers. This method satisfies most users' needs.  
Note: The EasyStartup program provides limited support for the IBM ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA  
Controller. You must use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure the disc array for this controller. However,  
after the disc arrays are configured, you can use the EasyStartup program to install the operating system and  
associated device driver. See “Using LSI Configuration Utility program” on page 204 for details.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 209  
Typical operating system installation  
When you select Install operating system, you will be prompted for information required for the installation.  
The prompts vary depending on the operating system selected. This section describes the tasks associated  
with a typical Windows operating system installation. Each task must be completed in order before moving  
to the next task.  
Note: Ensure that your RAID controller is correctly configured before you select an operating system to install.  
• Select operating system:  
This task enables you to select the operating system that you will be installing.  
• Select disk:  
This task enables you to select the disk where you want to install the operating system.  
Note: The disk that you select must be set as the boot disk in UEFI.  
• Partitions options:  
This task enables you to choose whether you want to repartition the selected drive or use an existing  
partition.  
• Partition settings:  
This task enables you to choose the file system type and define the partition size.  
• Installation settings:  
This task prompts you for user and system settings, the operating system product key, and the  
administrator password.  
• Network settings:  
This task prompts you for domain and workgroup settings, Ethernet controller type, IP address settings,  
DNS settings, and WINS address settings.  
• Install applications:  
This task enables you to run custom commands or scripts at the end of the installation process. It also  
facilitates the installation of DVD-burning software and ThinkServer EasyManage software products.  
• Install Windows components:  
This task enables you to install optional Windows components such as IIS, ASP.NET, and SNMP.  
• Confirm settings:  
This task enables you to review all of the information you provided.  
• Save response file:  
This task gives you the option of saving the information on a diskette or USB device as a response file for  
future installations on similarly configured Lenovo servers.  
• Start installation:  
This task starts the actual installation process. First, the disk is prepared using the disk and partition  
information you specified. Then you are prompted to insert the operating system disk, and the operating  
system is installed using the information that you specified.  
Installing your operating system without using EasyStartup  
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the EasyStartup program to install  
your operating system, do the following to download the latest operating-system installation instructions  
from the Lenovo Support Web site:  
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
210 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
4. Select the operating system that you want from the Operating system list, and click Continue.  
5. Click Operating system installation to download instructions to install the operating system.  
Updating the firmware  
The firmware in the server is periodically updated and is available for download on the Lenovo Support Web  
site. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support to check for the latest level of firmware, such as unified extensible  
firmware interface (UEFI) code, vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor firmware.  
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the server with the latest version of  
the firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing firmware from a diskette or  
CD image.  
• UEFI code is stored in programmable ROM (flash memory) on the system board.  
• IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the baseboard management controller on the system board.  
• Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.  
• ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the RAID controller.  
• Major components contain VPD code. You can use the IBM Advanced Settings Utility program to update  
the VPD code (see “IBM Advanced Settings Utility program” on page 214).  
The following items are downloadable at  
http://www.lenovo.com/support:  
• Diagnostics programs  
• IMM firmware  
• Ethernet firmware  
Using the EasyUpdate Firmware Updater tool  
ThinkServer EasyUpdate Firmware Updater is a software application that enables you to maintain your  
system firmware up to date and helps you avoid unnecessary outages. Firmware Updater updates the server  
firmware in two steps, by updating system firmware, adapter firmware, and hard disk drive (HDD) firmware.  
To update your system, first go to the Lenovo Support Web site and obtain the ISO file.  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
4. Click Downloads and drivers to download firmware updates.  
5. Download the ThinkServer firmware update media ISO file.  
6. Burn the ISO image on to a CD or DVD.  
7. Insert the media in the server DVD drive, and start the server to that drive.  
8. The application starts automatically. Hardware detection runs, and a list of applicable firmware updates  
is displayed.  
Note: You need to boot the CD or DVD two times; one time to update the system and adapter firmware  
and one time to update the HDD firmware.  
9. Select the firmware updates that you want to install.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 211  
     
Before distributing the firmware update to other servers, ensure that your server can restart successfully  
without encountering hardware problems.  
Starting the backup server firmware  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a secondary copy of the  
server firmware that you update only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary copy  
of the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.  
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the JP6 jumper in the  
backup position (pins 2 and 3).  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After the primary copy is  
restored, turn off the server; then, move the JP6 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
Recovering the UEFI firmware  
If the UEFI firmware has become damaged, such as from a power failure during an update, you can recover  
the UEFI firmware using the boot block jumper and a UEFI recovery diskette.  
The system board contains a backup copy area for the server firmware. This is a secondary copy of the  
server firmware that you update only during the process of updating the server firmware. If the primary copy  
of the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.  
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place jumper JP6 in the backup  
position (pins 2 and 3).  
• Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary BIOS page (default) .  
• Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup BIOS page.  
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After the primary copy is  
restored, turn off the server; then, move jumper JP6 back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).  
212 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
     
The following table describes the jumpers on the system board.  
Table 25. System board jumpers  
Jumper number  
Jumper name  
Jumper setting  
JP1  
Clear CMOS jumper 1  
• Pins 1 and 2: Keep CMOS data  
(default).  
• Pins 2 and 3: Clear CMOS data  
(including power-on password and  
administrator password)  
JP6  
Boot block jumper 2  
• Pins 1 and 2: Boot from primary  
BIOS page (default) .  
• Pins 2 and 3: Boot from backup  
BIOS page.  
Notes:  
1. If no jumper is present, the server responds as if the pins are set to 1 and 2.  
2. Changing the position of the UEFI boot recovery jumper from pins 1 and 2 to pins 2 and 3 before the server is  
turned on alters which flash ROM page is loaded. Do not change the jumper pin position after the server is  
turned on. This can cause an unpredictable problem.  
Using the integrated management module  
The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions that were formerly  
provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It combines service processor functions, video  
controller, and (when an optional virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip.  
The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:  
• Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan failure, and power supply  
failure.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 213  
 
• DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) disables a failing DIMM that is  
detected during POST, and the IMM lights the associated system error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.  
• System-event log (SEL).  
• ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.  
• Auto Boot Failure Recovery (ABR).  
• A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video, remote keyboard/mouse,  
and remote storage).  
• Nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) detection and reporting.  
• Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating system hangs and the  
operating system watchdog timer times-out. The IMM might be configured to watch for the operating  
system watchdog timer and reboot the system after a timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise,  
the IMM allows the administrator to generate a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI) by pressing an NMI button on  
the system board for an operating-system memory dump. ASR is supported by IPMI.  
• Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and Intelligent Platform Management  
Bus (IPMB) support.  
• Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.  
• Serial port redirection over Telnet or SSH.  
• Serial over LAN (SOL).  
• Query power-supply input power.  
• PECI 2 support.  
• Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset, schedule power control).  
• Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).  
• Operating-system failure blue screen capture.  
• Command-line interface.  
• Configuration save and restore.  
• PCI configuration data.  
• Boot sequence manipulation.  
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities through the OSA SMBridge  
management utility program:  
• Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)  
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management functions through the IPMI  
2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue commands to control the server power, view  
system information, and identify the server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and  
run the file as a script.  
• Serial over LAN  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote location. You can remotely  
view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server, identify the server, and perform other management  
functions. Any standard Telnet client application can access the SOL connection.  
IBM Advanced Settings Utility program  
The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the UEFI Setup Utility program for  
modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out of band to modify UEFI settings from the  
command line without the need to restart the system to access the UEFI Setup Utility program.  
214 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
You also can use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence features or other IMM settings.  
The remote presence features provide enhanced systems-management capabilities.  
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI function in the IMM through  
the command-line interface.  
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the settings as a file and run  
the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting environments through a batch-processing mode.  
Installing ThinkServer EasyManage software  
You can install the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server program from the ThinkServer EasyManage CD or  
you can download and install the program from http://www.lenovo.com/support. After one instance of the  
ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server has been installed, you can use the ThinkServer EasyManage Agent  
installer to install the agent on other servers and clients on the network.  
Also, the ThinkServer EasyStartup program provides an option to either install the ThinkServer EasyManage  
Agent as part of the operating system installation process or install a desktop icon to assist with the  
installation of the ThinkServer EasyManage Core Server after the operating system has been installed.  
Installation requirements  
Before installing ThinkServer EasyManage software on your server, your environment must meet the  
following requirements:  
• ®Microsoft Windows Server 2008 is installed on the server where you intend to install the Core Server.  
• The original Windows Server operating system installation CDs are available in case files are needed  
while installing the prerequisites.  
• The server has Internet access to obtain prerequisites and to activate the software after the installation is  
complete.  
• The server has a static IP address.  
• The server is not a domain controller. However, it is recommended to have the server join a domain.  
• The account that you use to log in and to install the Core Server has Administrator privileges on the  
server with full read/write access. Ideally, this account is also a Domain Administrator account. This  
account will be used to create the initial administrator-level account used to log in to the ThinkServer  
EasyManage console.  
• Any previous agent from EasyManage or LANDesk must be removed prior to installing the Core Server  
and Management Console.  
Installation order  
The order in which you install the operating system and Windows Components is critical to install  
ThinkServer EasyManage software successfully. To ensure a clean, working installation of ThinkServer  
EasyManage software, use the following installation order:  
1. Install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 32-bit with the latest Service Pack.  
2. Install the Windows Components: See “Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components” on page 216.  
3. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
4. Download Microsoft Web Services Enhancement 2.0 Service Pack 3 (LANDesk Process Manager only)  
from the following Web site:  
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=1ba1f631-c3e7-420a-bc1e-ef18bab66122&DisplayLang=  
Install the software using the default settings.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 215  
       
Note: This specific version is required.  
5. Use Windows Update to install all available critical updates.  
6. Launch the EasyManage installation.  
7. After ThinkServer EasyManage is installed, enable Security and Patch Manager to obtain the LANDesk  
8.8 Software Updates. In the console application, click Help -> LANDesk -> Security Updates for a  
guide to configuring Security and Patch Manager.  
8. Install ®Adobe Flash Player 9 if you plan to use the Management Console functions from the same server  
on which the Core Server is installed. You can obtain Adobe Flash Player 9 from the Adobe Web site:  
http://www.adobe.com/products/flashplayer/  
Installing Windows 2008 32-bit components  
To install the Windows Server 2008 32-bit components necessary for a ThinkServer EasyManage core  
server installation, complete the steps in this section.  
Installing Web Server Role (IIS)  
To install the Web Server Role (IIS), do the following:  
1. Click Start -> Server Manager.  
2. Under Roles Summary, click Add Roles. The Add Roles wizard appears.  
3. Click Next.  
4. Select the checkbox next to Web Server (IIS). A dialog box displays the additional features that are  
required.  
5. Click Add Required Features, then click Next. In the list of additional role services that can be installed,  
ensure that the following are selected:  
• HTTP Redirection  
• Static Content  
• ASP.NET  
• ASP  
• CGI  
• Server Side Includes  
• Windows Authentication  
• IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility  
Note: When you select ASP.Net or ASP, a dialog box displays the additional role services required.  
Click Add Required Role Services.  
6. Click Install.  
Note: If IIS is already installed and certain Role Services are still required, expand Roles in the tree view  
on the left in Server Manager and click on Web Server (IIS), then click on Add Role Services. Select the  
necessary role services and click Install.  
Installing Microsoft SNMP services  
To install Microsoft SNMP services, do the following:  
1. Click Add Features in the Features Summary section on the main page of Server Manager.  
2. Select the SNMP Services checkbox.  
3. Click Next, then Install.  
216 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
 
Uninstalling the LANDesk Software Agent  
If the Core Server has LANDesk agents on it from a previous Management Suite release, it will fail the  
autorun prerequisite check. You must remove the old agents by running uninstallwinclient.exe file from the  
\Program Files\LANDesk\ManagementSuite folder.  
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture  
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of the integrated  
management module (IMM). When the optional Lenovo Virtual Media Key is installed in the server, it  
activates the remote presence functions. The virtual media key is required to enable the integrated remote  
presence and blue-screen capture features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access  
the network remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system. However, you can still  
access the Web interface without the key.  
After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine whether it is valid. If  
the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web interface (when you attempt to start the remote  
presence feature) indicating that the hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.  
The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that the key is installed and  
functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates that the key might not be installed correctly.  
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:  
• Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1280 x 1024 at 75 Hz, regardless of the system  
state  
• Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote client  
• Mapping the DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote client, and mapping ISO and  
diskette image files as virtual drives that are available for use by the server  
• Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a virtual drive  
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM restarts the server when  
the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A system administrator can use the blue-screen  
capture to assist in determining the cause of the hang condition.  
Enabling the remote presence feature  
To enable the remote presence feature, complete the following steps:  
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see “Installing the virtual media  
key” on page 166).  
2. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control button  
becomes active.  
Obtaining the IP address for the IMM  
To access the Web interface, you need the IP address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address  
through the Setup utility. The server comes with a default IP address for the IMM of 192.168.70.125. To  
locate the IP address, complete the following steps:  
Step 1. Turn on the server.  
Note: Approximately 1 to 3 minutes after the server is connected to ac power, the power-control  
button becomes active.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 217  
         
Step 2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. (This prompt is displayed on the screen for  
only a few seconds. You must press F1 quickly.) If you have set both a power-on password and  
an administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the full Setup  
utility menu.  
Step 3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.  
Step 4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.  
Step 5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.  
Step 6. Find the IP address and write it down.  
Step 7. Exit from the Setup utility.  
Logging on to the Web interface  
To log on to the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the following steps:  
Step 1. Open a Web browser and in the address or URL field, type the IP address or host name of the  
IMM to which you want to connect.  
Note: The IMM defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM assigns a static IP  
address of 192.168.70.125.  
Step 2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM for the first time,  
you can obtain the user name and password from your system administrator. All login attempts are  
documented in the event log.  
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of PASSW0RD (passw0rd  
with a zero, not a the letter O). You have read/write access. You must change the default password  
the first time you log on.  
Step 3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is provided. The IMM  
will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is inactive for the number of minutes that  
you entered for the timeout value.  
Step 4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick view of the system  
status.  
Enabling the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program  
The Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program is part of the server firmware. You can use it to configure the  
network as a startable device, and you can customize where the network startup option appears in the  
startup sequence. Enable and disable the Intel Gigabit Ethernet Utility program from the Setup utility.  
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controllers  
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an interface for connecting  
to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables  
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support  
auto-negotiation, the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T) and  
duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and automatically operate at that rate and mode.  
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must install a device driver to  
enable the operating system to address the controllers. For device drivers and information about configuring  
the Ethernet controllers, see the Intel Hartwell 82574L Gigabit Ethernet Software CD that comes with the  
server. To find updated information about configuring the controllers, complete the following steps.  
218 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
       
Note: Changes are made periodically to the Lenovo Web site. The actual procedure might vary slightly  
from what is described in this document.  
1. Go to http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
2. Enter your product number (machine type and model number) or select Servers and Storage from  
the Select your product list.  
3. From Family list, select ThinkServer RS210, and click Continue.  
Enabling and configuring Serial over LAN (SOL)  
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote location. You can remotely  
view and change the BIOS settings, restart the server, identify the server, and perform other management  
functions. Any standard Telnet client application can access the SOL connection.  
To enable and configure the server for SOL, you must update and configure the UEFI code; update and  
configure the integrated management module (IMM) firmware; update and configure the Ethernet controller  
firmware; and enable the operating system for an SOL connection.  
UEFI update and configuration  
To update and configure the UEFI code to enable SOL, complete the following steps:  
1. Update the UEFI code:  
a. Download the latest version of the UEFI code from http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Update the UEFI code, following the instructions that come with the update file that you downloaded.  
2. Update the IMM firmware:  
a. Download the latest version of the IMM firmware from http://www.lenovo.com/support.  
b. Update the IMM firmware, following the instructions that come with the update file that you  
downloaded.  
3. Configure the UEFI settings:  
a. When you are prompted to start the Configuration/Setup Utility program, restart the server and  
press F1.  
b. Select System Settings → Devices and I/O Ports.  
c. Select Console Redirection Settings; then, make sure that the values are set as follows:  
• COM Port 1: Enable  
• Remote Console: Enable  
• Serial Port Sharing: Enable  
• Serial Port Access Mode: Dedicated COM1 Settings  
• Baud Rate: 115200  
• Data Bits: 8  
• Parity: None Stop  
• Bits: 1  
• Thermal Emulation: ANSI  
• Active After Boot: Enable  
• Flow Control: Hardware  
d. Press Esc twice to exit the Devices and I/O Ports section of the Configuration/Setup Utility program.  
e. Select Save Settings; then, press Enter.  
f. Press Enter to confirm.  
Chapter 8. Configuring the server 219  
   
g. Select Exit Setup; then, press Enter.  
h. Make sure that Yes, exit the Setup Utility is selected; then, press Enter.  
220 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Appendix A. Notices  
Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult  
your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your  
area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that  
Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service  
that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the user's  
responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service.  
Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this  
document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send  
license inquiries, in writing, to:  
Lenovo (United States), Inc.  
1009 Think Place - Building One  
Morrisville, NC 27560  
U.S.A.  
Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing  
LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow  
disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply  
to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically  
made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.  
Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this  
publication at any time without notice.  
The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support  
applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this  
document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document  
shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo  
or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is  
presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary.  
Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without  
incurring any obligation to you.  
Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in  
any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of  
the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.  
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result  
obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been  
made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same  
on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through  
extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their  
specific environment.  
© Copyright Lenovo 2009, 2010  
221  
 
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both:  
Lenovo  
Lenovo logo  
ThinkServer  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States,  
other countries, or both:  
®IBM  
™ServeRAID  
®Intel and ®Intel Xeon are trademarks of ®Intel Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.  
®Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of ®Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or  
both.  
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.  
Red Hat, the Red Hat “Shadow Man” logo, and all Red Hat-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Red Hat, Inc., in the United States and other countries.  
Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.  
Important notes  
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other factors also affect  
application performance.  
DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often less than the possible maximum.  
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume, KB stands for 1024 bytes,  
MB stands for 1␠048␠576 bytes, and GB stands for 1␠073␠741␠824 bytes.  
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands for 1␠000␠000 bytes,  
and GB stands for 1␠000␠000␠000 bytes. Total user-accessible capacity can vary depending on operating  
environments.  
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any standard hard disk drives  
and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest currently supported drives that are available  
from Lenovo.  
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an optional memory module.  
Lenovo makes no representation or warranties regarding non-Lenovo products and services, including but  
not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products  
are offered and warranted solely by third parties.  
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include user manuals or all  
program functionality.  
222 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Product recycling and disposal  
This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations. Lenovo  
encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it  
is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in  
recycling their IT products. Information on Lenovo product recycling offerings can be found on Lenovo's  
Internet site at http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la normativa nacional o local  
aplicable. Lenovo recomienda a los propietarios de equipos de tecnología de la información (TI) que reciclen  
responsablemente sus equipos cuando éstos ya no les sean útiles. Lenovo dispone de una serie de  
programas y servicios de devolución de productos, a fin de ayudar a los propietarios de equipos a reciclar  
sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar información sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de Lenovo  
en el sitio web de Lenovohttp://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment/recycling.  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and Norway.  
This appliance is labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical  
and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of  
used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products to  
indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Remarque : Cette marque s’applique uniquement aux pays de l’Union Européenne et à la Norvège.  
L’etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de Déchets des  
Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les dispositions de retour et de recyclage  
applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers l’Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette  
précise que le produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin de vie.  
In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) is to be collected  
separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per  
Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal  
waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and recovery of  
WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and  
human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and  
treatment, contact your local Lenovo representative.  
Appendix A. Notices 223  
 
Compliance with Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of  
Hazardous Substances  
Meets requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous  
Substances In Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE).  
Recycling statements for Japan  
224 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
Battery return program  
This product may contain a lithium or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for  
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may  
not be available in your area. For information on disposal or batteries outside the United States, go to  
http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment or contact your local waste disposal facility.  
For Taiwan: Please recycle batteries.  
For the European Union:  
Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).  
Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2006/66/EC  
concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries and accumulators. The Directive determines the  
framework for the return and recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the  
European Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to be thrown  
away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.  
Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux directives européennes  
2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs  
usés. Les directives déterminent la marche à suivre en vigueue dans l'Union Européenne pour le retour et  
le recyclage des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses batteries  
pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt récupérée en fin de cycle de vie  
selon cette norme.  
In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators are labeled to indicate  
that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end of life. The label on the battery may also include  
a chemical symbol for the metal concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury, and Cd for cadmium).  
Users of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as unsorted municipal  
waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recycling, and treatment of  
batteries and accumulators. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries  
Appendix A. Notices 225  
   
and accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous  
substances. For proper collection and treatment, go to http://www.lenovo.com/lenovo/environment.  
For California:  
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.  
The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations Title 22, Division 4.5  
Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate Materials. This product/part may include a lithium  
manganese dioxide battery which contains a perchlorate substance.  
German Ordinance for Work gloss statement  
The product is not suitable for use with visual display work place devices according to clause 2 of the  
German Ordinance for Work with Visual Display Units.  
Das Produkt ist nicht für den Einsatz an Bildschirmarbeitsplätzen im Sinne § 2 der  
Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung geeignet.  
Electronic emission notices  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against  
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment  
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required  
to correct the interference at his own expense.  
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits.  
Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended  
cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized  
changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)  
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement  
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.  
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.  
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference  
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
226 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
           
United Kingdom telecommunications safety requirement  
Notice to Customers  
This apparatus is approved under approval number NS/G/1234/J/100003 for indirect connection to public  
telecommunication systems in the United Kingdom.  
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement  
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/EC on the  
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot  
accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended  
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Lenovo option cards  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology  
Equipment according to CISPR 22/European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were  
derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference  
with licensed communication equipment.  
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference  
in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
Germany Class A compliance statement  
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:  
Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Verträglichkeit  
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) zur  
Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten  
und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.  
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu  
betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden.  
Lenovo übernimmt keine Verantwortung für die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt  
ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne  
Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/eingebaut werden.  
Deutschland:  
Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmittein  
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln”  
EMVG (früher “Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten”). Dies ist die Umsetzung der  
EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (früher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.  
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (früher Gesetz über die elektromagnetische  
Verträglichkeit von Geräten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC (früher 89/336/EWG), für  
Geräte der Klasse A.  
Appendix A. Notices 227  
     
Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen  
- CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo  
(Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart.  
Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:  
Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A.  
Nach der EN 55022: “Dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich  
Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen  
durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.”  
Nach dem EMVG: “Geräte dürfen an Orten, für die sie nicht ausreichend entstört sind, nur mit besonderer  
Genehmigung des Bundesministers für Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes für Post und  
Telekommunikation betrieben werden. Die Genehmigung wird erteilt, wenn keine elektromagnetischen  
Störungen zu erwarten sind.” (Auszug aus dem EMVG, Paragraph 3, Abs. 4). Dieses Genehmigungsverfahren  
ist nach Paragraph 9 EMVG in Verbindung mit der entsprechenden Kostenverordnung (Amtsblatt 14/93)  
kostenpflichtig.  
Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Handbüchern  
angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben.  
Japan Voluntary Control Council for Interference (VCCI) statement  
Taiwan Class A warning statement  
228 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
   
People's Republic of China Class A warning statement  
Korea Class A warning statement  
Appendix A. Notices 229  
   
230 Hardware Maintenance Manual  
Part Number: RS210  
Printed in USA  
(1P) P/N: RS210  
*RS210*  

InFocus TD32 User Manual
JVC GD 463D10E User Manual
JVC VIDEO NAVIGATOR GV DV1000 User Manual
KitchenAid Cooktop KGRT600H User Manual
Magnavox 1VMN29898 User Manual
Miele KM5773 User Manual
Palsonic 6830GY User Manual
Philips 25PT8703 User Manual
Philips DVP3996 User Manual
Philips ONIS Vox 6611 User Manual